xref: /netbsd-src/external/gpl3/binutils/dist/ld/ld.info (revision 48fb7bfab72acd4281a53bbee5ccf3f809019e75)
1This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 4.8 from ld.texinfo.
2
3INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
4START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
5* Ld: (ld).                       The GNU linker.
6END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
7
8   This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.23.2.
9
10   Copyright (C) 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999,
112000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
12Software Foundation, Inc.
13
14   Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
15under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
16any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
17Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
18Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
19Free Documentation License".
20
21
22File: ld.info,  Node: Top,  Next: Overview,  Up: (dir)
23
24LD
25**
26
27This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.23.2.
28
29   This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
30Documentation License version 1.3.  A copy of the license is included
31in the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
32
33* Menu:
34
35* Overview::                    Overview
36* Invocation::                  Invocation
37* Scripts::                     Linker Scripts
38
39* Machine Dependent::           Machine Dependent Features
40
41* BFD::                         BFD
42
43* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
44* MRI::                         MRI Compatible Script Files
45* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
46* LD Index::                       LD Index
47
48
49File: ld.info,  Node: Overview,  Next: Invocation,  Prev: Top,  Up: Top
50
511 Overview
52**********
53
54`ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their
55data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling
56a program is to run `ld'.
57
58   `ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
59AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
60total control over the linking process.
61
62   This version of `ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
63operate on object files. This allows `ld' to read, combine, and write
64object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or `a.out'.
65Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
66of object file.  *Note BFD::, for more information.
67
68   Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
69linkers in providing diagnostic information.  Many linkers abandon
70execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
71`ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
72some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
73
74
75File: ld.info,  Node: Invocation,  Next: Scripts,  Prev: Overview,  Up: Top
76
772 Invocation
78************
79
80The GNU linker `ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
81to be as compatible as possible with other linkers.  As a result, you
82have many choices to control its behavior.
83
84* Menu:
85
86* Options::                     Command Line Options
87* Environment::                 Environment Variables
88
89
90File: ld.info,  Node: Options,  Next: Environment,  Up: Invocation
91
922.1 Command Line Options
93========================
94
95   The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
96practice few of them are used in any particular context.  For instance,
97a frequent use of `ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
98standard, supported Unix system.  On such a system, to link a file
99`hello.o':
100
101     ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
102
103   This tells `ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
104linking the file `/lib/crt0.o' with `hello.o' and the library `libc.a',
105which will come from the standard search directories.  (See the
106discussion of the `-l' option below.)
107
108   Some of the command-line options to `ld' may be specified at any
109point in the command line.  However, options which refer to files, such
110as `-l' or `-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
111option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
112other file options.  Repeating non-file options with a different
113argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
114occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
115option.  Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
116noted in the descriptions below.
117
118   Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
119linked together.  They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
120command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
121placed between an option and its argument.
122
123   Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
124can specify other forms of binary input files using `-l', `-R', and the
125script command language.  If _no_ binary input files at all are
126specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
127message `No input files'.
128
129   If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
130assume that it is a linker script.  A script specified in this way
131augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
132linker script or the one specified by using `-T').  This feature
133permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
134or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
135`INPUT' or `GROUP' to load other objects.  Specifying a script in this
136way merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands
137placed after the main script; use the `-T' option to replace the
138default linker script entirely, but note the effect of the `INSERT'
139command.  *Note Scripts::.
140
141   For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
142either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
143given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
144requires them.
145
146   For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
147can precede the option name; for example, `-trace-symbol' and
148`--trace-symbol' are equivalent.  Note--there is one exception to this
149rule.  Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
150only be preceded by two dashes.  This is to reduce confusion with the
151`-o' option.  So for example `-omagic' sets the output file name to
152`magic' whereas `--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
153
154   Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
155the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
156immediately following the option that requires them.  For example,
157`--trace-symbol foo' and `--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent.  Unique
158abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
159
160   Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
161driver (e.g. `gcc') then all the linker command line options should be
162prefixed by `-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
163compiler driver) like this:
164
165       gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
166
167   This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
168silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.  Confusion
169may also arise when passing options that require values through a
170driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
171separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
172and the argument to the compiler.  In this case, it is simplest to use
173the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
174
175       gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
176
177   Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the
178GNU linker:
179
180`@FILE'
181     Read command-line options from FILE.  The options read are
182     inserted in place of the original @FILE option.  If FILE does not
183     exist, or cannot be read, then the option will be treated
184     literally, and not removed.
185
186     Options in FILE are separated by whitespace.  A whitespace
187     character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
188     option in either single or double quotes.  Any character
189     (including a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character
190     to be included with a backslash.  The FILE may itself contain
191     additional @FILE options; any such options will be processed
192     recursively.
193
194`-a KEYWORD'
195     This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility.  The KEYWORD
196     argument must be one of the strings `archive', `shared', or
197     `default'.  `-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to `-Bstatic',
198     and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
199     `-Bdynamic'.  This option may be used any number of times.
200
201`--audit AUDITLIB'
202     Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_AUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
203     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
204     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
205     `DT_AUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
206     to use. If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
207     searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
208     `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry in the output file.  This option is only
209     meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
210
211`-A ARCHITECTURE'
212`--architecture=ARCHITECTURE'
213     In the current release of `ld', this option is useful only for the
214     Intel 960 family of architectures.  In that `ld' configuration, the
215     ARCHITECTURE argument identifies the particular architecture in
216     the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
217     archive-library search path.  *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family:
218     i960, for details.
219
220     Future releases of `ld' may support similar functionality for
221     other architecture families.
222
223`-b INPUT-FORMAT'
224`--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
225     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
226     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the `-b'
227     option to specify the binary format for input object files that
228     follow this option on the command line.  Even when `ld' is
229     configured to support alternative object formats, you don't
230     usually need to specify this, as `ld' should be configured to
231     expect as a default input format the most usual format on each
232     machine.  INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular
233     format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You can list the
234     available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  *Note BFD::.
235
236     You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
237     unusual binary format.  You can also use `-b' to switch formats
238     explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
239     including `-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
240     particular format.
241
242     The default format is taken from the environment variable
243     `GNUTARGET'.  *Note Environment::.  You can also define the input
244     format from a script, using the command `TARGET'; see *Note Format
245     Commands::.
246
247`-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
248`--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
249     For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, `ld' accepts script
250     files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
251     described in *Note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI.  Introduce
252     MRI script files with the option `-c'; use the `-T' option to run
253     linker scripts written in the general-purpose `ld' scripting
254     language.  If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, `ld' looks for it in the
255     directories specified by any `-L' options.
256
257`-d'
258`-dc'
259`-dp'
260     These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
261     for compatibility with other linkers.  They assign space to common
262     symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with
263     `-r').  The script command `FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same
264     effect.  *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
265
266`--depaudit AUDITLIB'
267`-P AUDITLIB'
268     Adds AUDITLIB to the `DT_DEPAUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
269     AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
270     DT_SONAME specified in the library.  If specified multiple times
271     `DT_DEPAUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit
272     interfaces to use.  This option is only meaningful on ELF
273     platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.  The -P option is
274     provided for Solaris compatibility.
275
276`-e ENTRY'
277`--entry=ENTRY'
278     Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
279     program, rather than the default entry point.  If there is no
280     symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
281     and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
282     in base 10; you may use a leading `0x' for base 16, or a leading
283     `0' for base 8).  *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
284     and other ways of specifying the entry point.
285
286`--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
287     Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should
288     not be automatically exported.  The library names may be delimited
289     by commas or colons.  Specifying `--exclude-libs ALL' excludes
290     symbols in all archive libraries from automatic export.  This
291     option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
292     linker and for ELF targeted ports.  For i386 PE, symbols
293     explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of
294     this option.  For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this
295     option will be treated as hidden.
296
297`--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
298     Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
299     symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
300     copied wholesale into the import library being generated during
301     the link.  The module names may be delimited by commas or colons,
302     and must match exactly the filenames used by `ld' to open the
303     files; for archive members, this is simply the member name, but
304     for object files the name listed must include and match precisely
305     any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
306     command-line.  This option is available only for the i386 PE
307     targeted port of the linker.  Symbols explicitly listed in a .def
308     file are still exported, regardless of this option.
309
310`-E'
311`--export-dynamic'
312`--no-export-dynamic'
313     When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the `-E'
314     option or the `--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
315     all symbols to the dynamic symbol table.  The dynamic symbol table
316     is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at
317     run time.
318
319     If you do not use either of these options (or use the
320     `--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
321     dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols
322     which are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
323
324     If you use `dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
325     back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
326     dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
327     linking the program itself.
328
329     You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
330     be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports
331     it.  See the description of `--dynamic-list'.
332
333     Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports.  PE
334     targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a
335     DLL or EXE; see the description of `--export-all-symbols' below.
336
337`-EB'
338     Link big-endian objects.  This affects the default output format.
339
340`-EL'
341     Link little-endian objects.  This affects the default output
342     format.
343
344`-f NAME'
345`--auxiliary=NAME'
346     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
347     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
348     the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
349     auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
350
351     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
352     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
353     field.  If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
354     object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
355     shared object NAME.  If there is one, it will be used instead of
356     the definition in the filter object.  The shared object NAME need
357     not exist.  Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
358     alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
359     debugging or for machine specific performance.
360
361     This option may be specified more than once.  The DT_AUXILIARY
362     entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
363     command line.
364
365`-F NAME'
366`--filter=NAME'
367     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
368     field to the specified name.  This tells the dynamic linker that
369     the symbol table of the shared object which is being created
370     should be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared
371     object NAME.
372
373     If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
374     you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
375     field.  The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
376     symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
377     link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME.  Thus the
378     filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
379     provided by the object NAME.
380
381     Some older linkers used the `-F' option throughout a compilation
382     toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
383     output object files.  The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for
384     this purpose: the `-b', `--format', `--oformat' options, the
385     `TARGET' command in linker scripts, and the `GNUTARGET'
386     environment variable.  The GNU linker will ignore the `-F' option
387     when not creating an ELF shared object.
388
389`-fini=NAME'
390     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
391     the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
392     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_fini'
393     as the function to call.
394
395`-g'
396     Ignored.  Provided for compatibility with other tools.
397
398`-G VALUE'
399`--gpsize=VALUE'
400     Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
401     register to SIZE.  This is only meaningful for object file formats
402     such as MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects
403     into different sections.  This is ignored for other object file
404     formats.
405
406`-h NAME'
407`-soname=NAME'
408     When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
409     field to the specified name.  When an executable is linked with a
410     shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the
411     executable is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the
412     shared object specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the
413     using the file name given to the linker.
414
415`-i'
416     Perform an incremental link (same as option `-r').
417
418`-init=NAME'
419     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
420     the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
421     the address of the function.  By default, the linker uses `_init'
422     as the function to call.
423
424`-l NAMESPEC'
425`--library=NAMESPEC'
426     Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list
427     of files to link.  This option may be used any number of times.
428     If NAMESPEC is of the form `:FILENAME', `ld' will search the
429     library path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search
430     the library path for a file called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
431
432     On systems which support shared libraries, `ld' may also search for
433     files other than `libNAMESPEC.a'.  Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
434     systems, `ld' will search a directory for a library called
435     `libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called `libNAMESPEC.a'.
436     (By convention, a `.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
437     Note that this behavior does not apply to `:FILENAME', which
438     always specifies a file called FILENAME.
439
440     The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
441     it is specified on the command line.  If the archive defines a
442     symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before
443     the archive on the command line, the linker will include the
444     appropriate file(s) from the archive.  However, an undefined
445     symbol in an object appearing later on the command line will not
446     cause the linker to search the archive again.
447
448     See the `-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
449     archives multiple times.
450
451     You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
452
453     This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
454     However, if you are using `ld' on AIX, note that it is different
455     from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
456
457`-L SEARCHDIR'
458`--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
459     Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that `ld' will search for
460     archive libraries and `ld' control scripts.  You may use this
461     option any number of times.  The directories are searched in the
462     order in which they are specified on the command line.
463     Directories specified on the command line are searched before the
464     default directories.  All `-L' options apply to all `-l' options,
465     regardless of the order in which the options appear.  `-L' options
466     do not affect how `ld' searches for a linker script unless `-T'
467     option is specified.
468
469     If SEARCHDIR begins with `=', then the `=' will be replaced by the
470     "sysroot prefix", a path specified when the linker is configured.
471
472     The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
473     `-L') depends on which emulation mode `ld' is using, and in some
474     cases also on how it was configured.  *Note Environment::.
475
476     The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
477     `SEARCH_DIR' command.  Directories specified this way are searched
478     at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
479     line.
480
481`-m EMULATION'
482     Emulate the EMULATION linker.  You can list the available
483     emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.
484
485     If the `-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
486     `LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
487
488     Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
489     configured.
490
491`-M'
492`--print-map'
493     Print a link map to the standard output.  A link map provides
494     information about the link, including the following:
495
496        * Where object files are mapped into memory.
497
498        * How common symbols are allocated.
499
500        * All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
501          the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
502
503        * The values assigned to symbols.
504
505          Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
506          which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
507          symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
508          This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
509          only retains the final value of an expression.  Under such
510          circumstances the linker will display the final value
511          enclosed by square brackets.  Thus for example a linker
512          script containing:
513
514                  foo = 1
515                  foo = foo * 4
516                  foo = foo + 8
517
518          will produce the following output in the link map if the `-M'
519          option is used:
520
521                  0x00000001                foo = 0x1
522                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo * 0x4)
523                  [0x0000000c]                foo = (foo + 0x8)
524
525          See *Note Expressions:: for more information about
526          expressions in linker scripts.
527
528`-n'
529`--nmagic'
530     Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
531     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
532     numbers, mark the output as `NMAGIC'.
533
534`-N'
535`--omagic'
536     Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable.  Also,
537     do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
538     shared libraries.  If the output format supports Unix style magic
539     numbers, mark the output as `OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
540     text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform
541     to the format specification published by Microsoft.
542
543`--no-omagic'
544     This option negates most of the effects of the `-N' option.  It
545     sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
546     to be page-aligned.  Note - this option does not enable linking
547     against shared libraries.  Use `-Bdynamic' for this.
548
549`-o OUTPUT'
550`--output=OUTPUT'
551     Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by `ld'; if this
552     option is not specified, the name `a.out' is used by default.  The
553     script command `OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
554
555`-O LEVEL'
556     If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero `ld' optimizes the
557     output.  This might take significantly longer and therefore
558     probably should only be enabled for the final binary.  At the
559     moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
560     Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
561     Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour
562     for different non-zero values of this option.  Again this may
563     change with future releases.
564
565`-q'
566`--emit-relocs'
567     Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
568     Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this
569     information in order to perform correct modifications of
570     executables.  This results in larger executables.
571
572     This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
573
574`--force-dynamic'
575     Force the output file to have dynamic sections.  This option is
576     specific to VxWorks targets.
577
578`-r'
579`--relocatable'
580     Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that
581     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  This is often called "partial
582     linking".  As a side effect, in environments that support standard
583     Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
584     number to `OMAGIC'.  If this option is not specified, an absolute
585     file is produced.  When linking C++ programs, this option _will
586     not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use `-Ur'.
587
588     When an input file does not have the same format as the output
589     file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does
590     not contain any relocations.  Different output formats can have
591     further restrictions; for example some `a.out'-based formats do
592     not support partial linking with input files in other formats at
593     all.
594
595     This option does the same thing as `-i'.
596
597`-R FILENAME'
598`--just-symbols=FILENAME'
599     Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
600     relocate it or include it in the output.  This allows your output
601     file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
602     in other programs.  You may use this option more than once.
603
604     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
605     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
606     treated as the `-rpath' option.
607
608`-s'
609`--strip-all'
610     Omit all symbol information from the output file.
611
612`-S'
613`--strip-debug'
614     Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
615     output file.
616
617`-t'
618`--trace'
619     Print the names of the input files as `ld' processes them.
620
621`-T SCRIPTFILE'
622`--script=SCRIPTFILE'
623     Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script.  This script replaces `ld''s
624     default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
625     must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
626     *Note Scripts::.  If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
627     directory, `ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
628     preceding `-L' options.  Multiple `-T' options accumulate.
629
630`-dT SCRIPTFILE'
631`--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
632     Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script.  *Note Scripts::.
633
634     This option is similar to the `--script' option except that
635     processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
636     command line has been processed.  This allows options placed after
637     the `--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
638     behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
639     linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user.
640     (eg because the command line is being constructed by another tool,
641     such as `gcc').
642
643`-u SYMBOL'
644`--undefined=SYMBOL'
645     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
646     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
647     modules from standard libraries.  `-u' may be repeated with
648     different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
649     This option is equivalent to the `EXTERN' linker script command.
650
651`-Ur'
652     For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
653     `-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
654     can in turn serve as input to `ld'.  When linking C++ programs,
655     `-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike `-r'.  It
656     does not work to use `-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
657     with `-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
658     be added to.  Use `-Ur' only for the last partial link, and `-r'
659     for the others.
660
661`--unique[=SECTION]'
662     Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
663     SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
664     for every orphan input section.  An orphan section is one not
665     specifically mentioned in a linker script.  You may use this option
666     multiple times on the command line;  It prevents the normal
667     merging of input sections with the same name, overriding output
668     section assignments in a linker script.
669
670`-v'
671`--version'
672`-V'
673     Display the version number for `ld'.  The `-V' option also lists
674     the supported emulations.
675
676`-x'
677`--discard-all'
678     Delete all local symbols.
679
680`-X'
681`--discard-locals'
682     Delete all temporary local symbols.  (These symbols start with
683     system-specific local label prefixes, typically `.L' for ELF
684     systems or `L' for traditional a.out systems.)
685
686`-y SYMBOL'
687`--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
688     Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears.  This
689     option may be given any number of times.  On many systems it is
690     necessary to prepend an underscore.
691
692     This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
693     link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
694
695`-Y PATH'
696     Add PATH to the default library search path.  This option exists
697     for Solaris compatibility.
698
699`-z KEYWORD'
700     The recognized keywords are:
701    `combreloc'
702          Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make
703          dynamic symbol lookup caching possible.
704
705    `defs'
706          Disallows undefined symbols in object files.  Undefined
707          symbols in shared libraries are still allowed.
708
709    `execstack'
710          Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
711
712    `initfirst'
713          This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
714          It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
715          occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
716          brought into the process at the same time.  Similarly the
717          runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
718          runtime finalization of any other objects.
719
720    `interpose'
721          Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all
722          symbols but the primary executable.
723
724    `lazy'
725          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
726          tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
727          the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
728          than at load time.  Lazy binding is the default.
729
730    `loadfltr'
731          Marks  the object that its filters be processed immediately at
732          runtime.
733
734    `muldefs'
735          Allows multiple definitions.
736
737    `nocombreloc'
738          Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
739
740    `nocopyreloc'
741          Disables production of copy relocs.
742
743    `nodefaultlib'
744          Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this
745          object will ignore any default library search paths.
746
747    `nodelete'
748          Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
749
750    `nodlopen'
751          Marks the object not available to `dlopen'.
752
753    `nodump'
754          Marks the object can not be dumped by `dldump'.
755
756    `noexecstack'
757          Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
758
759    `norelro'
760          Don't create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the
761          object.
762
763    `now'
764          When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
765          tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
766          program is started, or when the shared library is linked to
767          using dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution
768          to the point when the function is first called.
769
770    `origin'
771          Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
772
773    `relro'
774          Create an ELF `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
775
776    `max-page-size=VALUE'
777          Set the emulation maximum page size to VALUE.
778
779    `common-page-size=VALUE'
780          Set the emulation common page size to VALUE.
781
782
783     Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
784
785`-( ARCHIVES -)'
786`--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
787     The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files.  They may be
788     either explicit file names, or `-l' options.
789
790     The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
791     undefined references are created.  Normally, an archive is
792     searched only once in the order that it is specified on the
793     command line.  If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an
794     undefined symbol referred to by an object in an archive that
795     appears later on the command line, the linker would not be able to
796     resolve that reference.  By grouping the archives, they all be
797     searched repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
798
799     Using this option has a significant performance cost.  It is best
800     to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
801     between two or more archives.
802
803`--accept-unknown-input-arch'
804`--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
805     Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
806     recognised.  The assumption is that the user knows what they are
807     doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
808     This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release
809     2.14.  The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to
810     reject such input files, and so the `--accept-unknown-input-arch'
811     option has been added to restore the old behaviour.
812
813`--as-needed'
814`--no-as-needed'
815     This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
816     mentioned on the command line after the `--as-needed' option.
817     Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
818     library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
819     library is actually needed or not.  `--as-needed' causes a
820     DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that satisfies an
821     undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if the
822     library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries
823     linked up to that point, an undefined symbol reference from
824     another dynamic library.  `--no-as-needed' restores the default
825     behaviour.
826
827`--add-needed'
828`--no-add-needed'
829     These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
830     their names to the `--as-needed' and `--no-as-needed' options.
831     They have been replaced by `--copy-dt-needed-entries' and
832     `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
833
834`-assert KEYWORD'
835     This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
836
837`-Bdynamic'
838`-dy'
839`-call_shared'
840     Link against dynamic libraries.  This is only meaningful on
841     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  This option
842     is normally the default on such platforms.  The different variants
843     of this option are for compatibility with various systems.  You
844     may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
845     library searching for `-l' options which follow it.
846
847`-Bgroup'
848     Set the `DF_1_GROUP' flag in the `DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
849     section.  This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
850     object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
851     `--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied.  This option is only
852     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
853
854`-Bstatic'
855`-dn'
856`-non_shared'
857`-static'
858     Do not link against shared libraries.  This is only meaningful on
859     platforms for which shared libraries are supported.  The different
860     variants of this option are for compatibility with various
861     systems.  You may use this option multiple times on the command
862     line: it affects library searching for `-l' options which follow
863     it.  This option also implies `--unresolved-symbols=report-all'.
864     This option can be used with `-shared'.  Doing so means that a
865     shared library is being created but that all of the library's
866     external references must be resolved by pulling in entries from
867     static libraries.
868
869`-Bsymbolic'
870     When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
871     to the definition within the shared library, if any.  Normally, it
872     is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
873     override the definition within the shared library.  This option is
874     only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
875
876`-Bsymbolic-functions'
877     When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
878     symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.  This
879     option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
880     libraries.
881
882`--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
883     Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker.  This is
884     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
885     global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
886     definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
887     linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
888     added to the symbol table in the executable.  This option is only
889     meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
890
891     The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
892     without scope and node name.  See *Note VERSION:: for more
893     information.
894
895`--dynamic-list-data'
896     Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
897
898`--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
899     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
900     It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
901
902`--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
903     Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
904     identification.
905
906`--check-sections'
907`--no-check-sections'
908     Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
909     been assigned to see if there are any overlaps.  Normally the
910     linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
911     will produce suitable error messages.  The linker does know about,
912     and does make allowances for sections in overlays.  The default
913     behaviour can be restored by using the command line switch
914     `--check-sections'.  Section overlap is not usually checked for
915     relocatable links.  You can force checking in that case by using
916     the `--check-sections' option.
917
918`--copy-dt-needed-entries'
919`--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'
920     This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
921     by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
922     command line.  Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
923     output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
924     input dynamic library.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' specified
925     on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
926     will have their DT_NEEDED entries added.  The default behaviour
927     can be restored with `--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
928
929     This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
930     dynamic libraries.  With `--copy-dt-needed-entries' dynamic
931     libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
932     searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
933     order to resolve symbols required by the output binary.  With the
934     default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
935     follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself.  No DT_NEEDED
936     links will be traversed to resolve symbols.
937
938`--cref'
939     Output a cross reference table.  If a linker map file is being
940     generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
941     Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
942
943     The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
944     easily processed by a script if necessary.  The symbols are
945     printed out, sorted by name.  For each symbol, a list of file
946     names is given.  If the symbol is defined, the first file listed
947     is the location of the definition.  The remaining files contain
948     references to the symbol.
949
950`--no-define-common'
951     This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
952     The script command `INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
953     *Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
954
955     The `--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
956     assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
957     file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces
958     assigning addresses to Common symbols.  Using `--no-define-common'
959     allows Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to
960     be assigned addresses only in the main program.  This eliminates
961     the unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also
962     prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
963     duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized
964     search paths for runtime symbol resolution.
965
966`--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
967     Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
968     address given by EXPRESSION.  You may use this option as many
969     times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line.
970     A limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in
971     this context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of
972     an existing symbol, or use `+' and `-' to add or subtract
973     hexadecimal constants or symbols.  If you need more elaborate
974     expressions, consider using the linker command language from a
975     script (*note Assignment: Symbol Definitions: Assignments.).
976     _Note:_ there should be no white space between SYMBOL, the equals
977     sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
978
979`--demangle[=STYLE]'
980`--no-demangle'
981     These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
982     messages and other output.  When the linker is told to demangle,
983     it tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
984     leading underscores if they are used by the object file format,
985     and converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
986     Different compilers have different mangling styles.  The optional
987     demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
988     demangling style for your compiler.  The linker will demangle by
989     default unless the environment variable `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
990     set.  These options may be used to override the default.
991
992`-IFILE'
993`--dynamic-linker=FILE'
994     Set the name of the dynamic linker.  This is only meaningful when
995     generating dynamically linked ELF executables.  The default dynamic
996     linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what
997     you are doing.
998
999`--fatal-warnings'
1000`--no-fatal-warnings'
1001     Treat all warnings as errors.  The default behaviour can be
1002     restored with the option `--no-fatal-warnings'.
1003
1004`--force-exe-suffix'
1005     Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1006
1007     If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1008     `.exe' or `.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
1009     output file to one of the same name with a `.exe' suffix. This
1010     option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
1011     Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run
1012     an image unless it ends in a `.exe' suffix.
1013
1014`--gc-sections'
1015`--no-gc-sections'
1016     Enable garbage collection of unused input sections.  It is ignored
1017     on targets that do not support this option.  The default behaviour
1018     (of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
1019     specifying `--no-gc-sections' on the command line.
1020
1021     `--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
1022     symbols and relocations.  The section containing the entry symbol
1023     and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
1024     will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
1025     dynamic objects.  Note that when building shared libraries, the
1026     linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced.  Once
1027     this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
1028     recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1029     relocations.  See `--entry' and `--undefined'.
1030
1031     This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
1032     option `-r').  In this case the root of symbols kept must be
1033     explicitly specified either by an `--entry' or `--undefined'
1034     option or by a `ENTRY' command in the linker script.
1035
1036`--print-gc-sections'
1037`--no-print-gc-sections'
1038     List all sections removed by garbage collection.  The listing is
1039     printed on stderr.  This option is only effective if garbage
1040     collection has been enabled via the `--gc-sections') option.  The
1041     default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
1042     can be restored by specifying `--no-print-gc-sections' on the
1043     command line.
1044
1045`--print-output-format'
1046     Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1047     other command-line options).  This is the string that would appear
1048     in an `OUTPUT_FORMAT' linker script command (*note File
1049     Commands::).
1050
1051`--help'
1052     Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
1053     and exit.
1054
1055`--target-help'
1056     Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard
1057     output and exit.
1058
1059`-Map=MAPFILE'
1060     Print a link map to the file MAPFILE.  See the description of the
1061     `-M' option, above.
1062
1063`--no-keep-memory'
1064     `ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1065     symbol tables of input files in memory.  This option tells `ld' to
1066     instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
1067     as necessary.  This may be required if `ld' runs out of memory
1068     space while linking a large executable.
1069
1070`--no-undefined'
1071`-z defs'
1072     Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
1073     This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
1074     library.  The switch `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
1075     behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1076     libraries being linked in.
1077
1078`--allow-multiple-definition'
1079`-z muldefs'
1080     Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1081     report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
1082     the first definition will be used.
1083
1084`--allow-shlib-undefined'
1085`--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
1086     Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.  This
1087     switch is similar to `--no-undefined' except that it determines
1088     the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library
1089     rather than a regular object file.  It does not affect how
1090     undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1091
1092     The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1093     referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
1094     create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being
1095     used to create a shared library.
1096
1097     The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1098     libraries specified at link time are that:
1099
1100        * A shared library specified at link time may not be the same
1101          as the one that is available at load time, so the symbol
1102          might actually be resolvable at load time.
1103
1104        * There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
1105          undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1106
1107          The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
1108          time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
1109          current architecture.  This is used, for example, to
1110          dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
1111
1112`--no-undefined-version'
1113     Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
1114     ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
1115     and a fatal error will be issued instead.
1116
1117`--default-symver'
1118     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1119     unversioned exported symbols.
1120
1121`--default-imported-symver'
1122     Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
1123     unversioned imported symbols.
1124
1125`--no-warn-mismatch'
1126     Normally `ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
1127     files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
1128     have been compiled for different processors or for different
1129     endiannesses.  This option tells `ld' that it should silently
1130     permit such possible errors.  This option should only be used with
1131     care, in cases when you have taken some special action that
1132     ensures that the linker errors are inappropriate.
1133
1134`--no-warn-search-mismatch'
1135     Normally `ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1136     library during a library search.  This option silences the warning.
1137
1138`--no-whole-archive'
1139     Turn off the effect of the `--whole-archive' option for subsequent
1140     archive files.
1141
1142`--noinhibit-exec'
1143     Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1144     Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
1145     encounters errors during the link process; it exits without
1146     writing an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
1147
1148`-nostdlib'
1149     Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1150     command line.  Library directories specified in linker scripts
1151     (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are
1152     ignored.
1153
1154`--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
1155     `ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1156     file.  If your `ld' is configured this way, you can use the
1157     `--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
1158     object file.  Even when `ld' is configured to support alternative
1159     object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as `ld'
1160     should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1161     usual format on each machine.  OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
1162     name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries.  (You
1163     can list the available binary formats with `objdump -i'.)  The
1164     script command `OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
1165     but this option overrides it.  *Note BFD::.
1166
1167`-pie'
1168`--pic-executable'
1169     Create a position independent executable.  This is currently only
1170     supported on ELF platforms.  Position independent executables are
1171     similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
1172     dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
1173     (which can vary between invocations).  Like normal dynamically
1174     linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
1175     executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1176
1177`-qmagic'
1178     This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1179
1180`-Qy'
1181     This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1182
1183`--relax'
1184`--no-relax'
1185     An option with machine dependent effects.  This option is only
1186     supported on a few targets.  *Note `ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
1187     *Note `ld' and the Intel 960 family: i960.  *Note `ld' and Xtensa
1188     Processors: Xtensa.  *Note `ld' and the 68HC11 and 68HC12:
1189     M68HC11/68HC12.  *Note `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support:
1190     PowerPC ELF32.
1191
1192     On some platforms the `--relax' option performs target specific,
1193     global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1194     addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1195     synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1196     instructions, and combinig constant values.
1197
1198     On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
1199     symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible.  This
1200     is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1201     family of processors.
1202
1203     On platforms where this is not supported, `--relax' is accepted,
1204     but ignored.
1205
1206     On platforms where `--relax' is accepted the option `--no-relax'
1207     can be used to disable the feature.
1208
1209`--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
1210     Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
1211     all others.  FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
1212     per line.  This option is especially useful in environments (such
1213     as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
1214     gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
1215
1216     `--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
1217     symbols needed for relocations.
1218
1219     You may only specify `--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
1220     line.  It overrides `-s' and `-S'.
1221
1222`-rpath=DIR'
1223     Add a directory to the runtime library search path.  This is used
1224     when linking an ELF executable with shared objects.  All `-rpath'
1225     arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
1226     uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.  The `-rpath'
1227     option is also used when locating shared objects which are needed
1228     by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1229     description of the `-rpath-link' option.  If `-rpath' is not used
1230     when linking an ELF executable, the contents of the environment
1231     variable `LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if it is defined.
1232
1233     The `-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS.  By default, on
1234     SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
1235     `-L' options it is given.  If a `-rpath' option is used, the
1236     runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the `-rpath'
1237     options, ignoring the `-L' options.  This can be useful when using
1238     gcc, which adds many `-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
1239     systems.
1240
1241     For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the `-R' option is
1242     followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
1243     treated as the `-rpath' option.
1244
1245`-rpath-link=DIR'
1246     When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
1247     This happens when an `ld -shared' link includes a shared library
1248     as one of the input files.
1249
1250     When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
1251     non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
1252     locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
1253     it is not included explicitly.  In such a case, the `-rpath-link'
1254     option specifies the first set of directories to search.  The
1255     `-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
1256     either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1257     appearing multiple times.
1258
1259     This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
1260     path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
1261     such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
1262     search path than the runtime linker would do.
1263
1264     The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
1265     shared libraries:
1266       1. Any directories specified by `-rpath-link' options.
1267
1268       2. Any directories specified by `-rpath' options.  The difference
1269          between `-rpath' and `-rpath-link' is that directories
1270          specified by `-rpath' options are included in the executable
1271          and used at runtime, whereas the `-rpath-link' option is only
1272          effective at link time. Searching `-rpath' in this way is
1273          only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
1274          been configured with the `--with-sysroot' option.
1275
1276       3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the `-rpath' and
1277          `-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
1278          the environment variable `LD_RUN_PATH'.
1279
1280       4. On SunOS, if the `-rpath' option was not used, search any
1281          directories specified using `-L' options.
1282
1283       5. For a native linker, the search the contents of the
1284          environment variable `LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
1285
1286       6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in `DT_RUNPATH' or
1287          `DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
1288          libraries needed by it. The `DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
1289          `DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
1290
1291       7. The default directories, normally `/lib' and `/usr/lib'.
1292
1293       8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
1294          `/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
1295          that file.
1296
1297     If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
1298     a warning and continue with the link.
1299
1300`-shared'
1301`-Bshareable'
1302     Create a shared library.  This is currently only supported on ELF,
1303     XCOFF and SunOS platforms.  On SunOS, the linker will
1304     automatically create a shared library if the `-e' option is not
1305     used and there are undefined symbols in the link.
1306
1307`--sort-common'
1308`--sort-common=ascending'
1309`--sort-common=descending'
1310     This option tells `ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1311     ascending or descending order when it places them in the
1312     appropriate output sections.  The symbol alignments considered are
1313     sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
1314     one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
1315     constraints.  If no sorting order is specified, then descending
1316     order is assumed.
1317
1318`--sort-section=name'
1319     This option will apply `SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
1320     patterns in the linker script.
1321
1322`--sort-section=alignment'
1323     This option will apply `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
1324     patterns in the linker script.
1325
1326`--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
1327     Similar to `--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
1328     each input file when SIZE is reached.  SIZE defaults to a size of
1329     1 if not given.
1330
1331`--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
1332     Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
1333     single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
1334     relocations.  This is useful when generating huge relocatable
1335     files for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF
1336     object file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
1337     relocations in a single section.  Note that this will fail to work
1338     with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
1339     The linker will not split up individual input sections for
1340     redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
1341     COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
1342     relocations.  COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
1343
1344`--stats'
1345     Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
1346     such as execution time and memory usage.
1347
1348`--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
1349     Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1350     configure-time default.  This option is only supported by linkers
1351     that were configured using `--with-sysroot'.
1352
1353`--traditional-format'
1354     For some targets, the output of `ld' is different in some ways from
1355     the output of some existing linker.  This switch requests `ld' to
1356     use the traditional format instead.
1357
1358     For example, on SunOS, `ld' combines duplicate entries in the
1359     symbol string table.  This can reduce the size of an output file
1360     with full debugging information by over 30 percent.
1361     Unfortunately, the SunOS `dbx' program can not read the resulting
1362     program (`gdb' has no trouble).  The `--traditional-format' switch
1363     tells `ld' to not combine duplicate entries.
1364
1365`--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
1366     Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
1367     by ORG.  You may use this option as many times as necessary to
1368     locate multiple sections in the command line.  ORG must be a
1369     single hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers,
1370     you may omit the leading `0x' usually associated with hexadecimal
1371     values.  _Note:_ there should be no white space between
1372     SECTIONNAME, the equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
1373
1374`-Tbss=ORG'
1375`-Tdata=ORG'
1376`-Ttext=ORG'
1377     Same as `--section-start', with `.bss', `.data' or `.text' as the
1378     SECTIONNAME.
1379
1380`-Ttext-segment=ORG'
1381     When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the
1382     address of the first byte of the text segment.
1383
1384`-Trodata-segment=ORG'
1385     When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1386     the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the
1387     executable text, it will set the address of the first byte of the
1388     read-only data segment.
1389
1390`--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
1391     Determine how to handle unresolved symbols.  There are four
1392     possible values for `method':
1393
1394    `ignore-all'
1395          Do not report any unresolved symbols.
1396
1397    `report-all'
1398          Report all unresolved symbols.  This is the default.
1399
1400    `ignore-in-object-files'
1401          Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
1402          libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
1403          files.
1404
1405    `ignore-in-shared-libs'
1406          Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object
1407          files, but ignore them if they come from shared libraries.
1408          This can be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is
1409          known that all the shared libraries that it should be
1410          referencing are included on the linker's command line.
1411
1412     The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
1413     controlled by the `--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
1414
1415     Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
1416     reported unresolved symbol but the option
1417     `--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
1418
1419`--dll-verbose'
1420`--verbose[=NUMBER]'
1421     Display the version number for `ld' and list the linker emulations
1422     supported.  Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
1423     Display the linker script being used by the linker. If the
1424     optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
1425     displayed.
1426
1427`--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
1428     Specify the name of a version script to the linker.  This is
1429     typically used when creating shared libraries to specify
1430     additional information about the version hierarchy for the library
1431     being created.  This option is only fully supported on ELF
1432     platforms which support shared libraries; see *Note VERSION::.  It
1433     is partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version
1434     scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1435     symbols marked `local' in the version script will not be exported.
1436     *Note WIN32::.
1437
1438`--warn-common'
1439     Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol
1440     or with a symbol definition.  Unix linkers allow this somewhat
1441     sloppy practise, but linkers on some other operating systems do
1442     not.  This option allows you to find potential problems from
1443     combining global symbols.  Unfortunately, some C libraries use
1444     this practise, so you may get some warnings about symbols in the
1445     libraries as well as in your programs.
1446
1447     There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
1448     examples:
1449
1450    `int i = 1;'
1451          A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
1452          the output file.
1453
1454    `extern int i;'
1455          An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.  There
1456          must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1457          variable somewhere.
1458
1459    `int i;'
1460          A common symbol.  If there are only (one or more) common
1461          symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data
1462          area of the output file.  The linker merges multiple common
1463          symbols for the same variable into a single symbol.  If they
1464          are of different sizes, it picks the largest size.  The
1465          linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1466          a definition of the same variable.
1467
1468     The `--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1469     Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
1470     symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
1471     symbol encountered with the same name.  One or both of the two
1472     symbols will be a common symbol.
1473
1474       1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
1475          already a definition for the symbol.
1476               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1477                  overridden by definition
1478               FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
1479
1480       2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
1481          definition for the symbol is encountered.  This is the same
1482          as the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered
1483          in a different order.
1484               FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
1485                  overriding common
1486               FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
1487
1488       3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
1489          symbol.
1490               FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
1491                  of `SYMBOL'
1492               FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
1493
1494       4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1495               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1496                  overridden by larger common
1497               FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
1498
1499       5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common
1500          symbol.  This is the same as the previous case, except that
1501          the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1502               FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
1503                  overriding smaller common
1504               FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
1505
1506`--warn-constructors'
1507     Warn if any global constructors are used.  This is only useful for
1508     a few object file formats.  For formats like COFF or ELF, the
1509     linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
1510
1511`--warn-multiple-gp'
1512     Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
1513     file.  This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
1514     Alpha.  Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants
1515     in a special section.  A special register (the global pointer)
1516     points into the middle of this section, so that constants can be
1517     loaded efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode.
1518     Since the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and
1519     relatively small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of
1520     the constant pool.  Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary
1521     to use multiple global pointer values in order to be able to
1522     address all possible constants.  This option causes a warning to
1523     be issued whenever this case occurs.
1524
1525`--warn-once'
1526     Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
1527     module which refers to it.
1528
1529`--warn-section-align'
1530     Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1531     alignment.  Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
1532     section.  The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
1533     specified; that is, if the `SECTIONS' command does not specify a
1534     start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
1535
1536`--warn-shared-textrel'
1537     Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
1538
1539`--warn-alternate-em'
1540     Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
1541
1542`--warn-unresolved-symbols'
1543     If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
1544     option `--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
1545     This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1546
1547`--error-unresolved-symbols'
1548     This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
1549     when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1550
1551`--whole-archive'
1552     For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
1553     `--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
1554     in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
1555     object files.  This is normally used to turn an archive file into
1556     a shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
1557     resulting shared library.  This option may be used more than once.
1558
1559     Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
1560     about this option, so you have to use `-Wl,-whole-archive'.
1561     Second, don't forget to use `-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your
1562     list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1563     your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1564
1565`--wrap=SYMBOL'
1566     Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL.  Any undefined reference to
1567     SYMBOL will be resolved to `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  Any undefined
1568     reference to `__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
1569
1570     This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function.  The
1571     wrapper function should be called `__wrap_SYMBOL'.  If it wishes
1572     to call the system function, it should call `__real_SYMBOL'.
1573
1574     Here is a trivial example:
1575
1576          void *
1577          __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
1578          {
1579            printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
1580            return __real_malloc (c);
1581          }
1582
1583     If you link other code with this file using `--wrap malloc', then
1584     all calls to `malloc' will call the function `__wrap_malloc'
1585     instead.  The call to `__real_malloc' in `__wrap_malloc' will call
1586     the real `malloc' function.
1587
1588     You may wish to provide a `__real_malloc' function as well, so that
1589     links without the `--wrap' option will succeed.  If you do this,
1590     you should not put the definition of `__real_malloc' in the same
1591     file as `__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1592     call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to `malloc'.
1593
1594`--eh-frame-hdr'
1595     Request creation of `.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF
1596     `PT_GNU_EH_FRAME' segment header.
1597
1598`--no-ld-generated-unwind-info'
1599     Request creation of `.eh_frame' unwind info for linker generated
1600     code sections like PLT.  This option is on by default if linker
1601     generated unwind info is supported.
1602
1603`--enable-new-dtags'
1604`--disable-new-dtags'
1605     This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
1606     ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
1607     `--enable-new-dtags', the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1608     If you specify `--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be
1609     created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note
1610     that those options are only available for ELF systems.
1611
1612`--hash-size=NUMBER'
1613     Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1614     close to NUMBER.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1615     time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1616     increasing the linker's memory requirements.  Similarly reducing
1617     this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
1618     speed.
1619
1620`--hash-style=STYLE'
1621     Set the type of linker's hash table(s).  STYLE can be either
1622     `sysv' for classic ELF `.hash' section, `gnu' for new style GNU
1623     `.gnu.hash' section or `both' for both the classic ELF `.hash' and
1624     new style GNU `.gnu.hash' hash tables.  The default is `sysv'.
1625
1626`--reduce-memory-overheads'
1627     This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
1628     expense of linking speed.  This was introduced to select the old
1629     O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
1630     O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1631
1632     Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
1633     to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
1634     linker's run time.  This is not done however if the `--hash-size'
1635     switch has been used.
1636
1637     The `--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
1638     enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
1639
1640`--build-id'
1641`--build-id=STYLE'
1642     Request creation of `.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section.  The
1643     contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked file.
1644     STYLE can be `uuid' to use 128 random bits, `sha1' to use a
1645     160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
1646     `md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on the normative parts of the
1647     output contents, or `0xHEXSTRING' to use a chosen bit string
1648     specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (`-' and `:'
1649     characters between digit pairs are ignored).  If STYLE is omitted,
1650     `sha1' is used.
1651
1652     The `md5' and `sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
1653     the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
1654     nonidentical output files.  It is not intended to be compared as a
1655     checksum for the file's contents.  A linked file may be changed
1656     later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
1657     original linked file does not change.
1658
1659     Passing `none' for STYLE disables the setting from any
1660     `--build-id' options earlier on the command line.
1661
16622.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
1663-----------------------------------------
1664
1665The i386 PE linker supports the `-shared' option, which causes the
1666output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
1667executable.  You should name the output `*.dll' when you use this
1668option.  In addition, the linker fully supports the standard `*.def'
1669files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
1670file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
1671ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
1672
1673   In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
1674support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
1675PE target.  Options that take values may be separated from their values
1676by either a space or an equals sign.
1677
1678`--add-stdcall-alias'
1679     If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
1680     as-is and also with the suffix stripped.  [This option is specific
1681     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1682
1683`--base-file FILE'
1684     Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
1685     of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with `dlltool'.
1686     [This is an i386 PE specific option]
1687
1688`--dll'
1689     Create a DLL instead of a regular executable.  You may also use
1690     `-shared' or specify a `LIBRARY' in a given `.def' file.  [This
1691     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1692
1693`--enable-long-section-names'
1694`--disable-long-section-names'
1695     The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that
1696     permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
1697     normal limit for Coff.  By default, these names are only allowed
1698     in object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry
1699     the Coff string table required to support the longer names.  As a
1700     GNU extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable
1701     images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)  disallow it in
1702     object files, by using these two options.  Executable images
1703     generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard,
1704     carrying as they do a string table, and may generate confusing
1705     output when examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file
1706     viewers and dumpers.  However, GDB relies on the use of PE long
1707     section names to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an
1708     executable image at runtime, and so if neither option is specified
1709     on the command-line, `ld' will enable long section names,
1710     overriding the default and technically correct behaviour, when it
1711     finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
1712     image and not stripping symbols.  [This option is valid for all PE
1713     targeted ports of the linker]
1714
1715`--enable-stdcall-fixup'
1716`--disable-stdcall-fixup'
1717     If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
1718     to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
1719     differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
1720     and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match.  For
1721     example, the undefined symbol `_foo' might be linked to the
1722     function `_foo@12', or the undefined symbol `_bar@16' might be
1723     linked to the function `_bar'.  When the linker does this, it
1724     prints a warning, since it normally should have failed to link,
1725     but sometimes import libraries generated from third-party dlls may
1726     need this feature to be usable.  If you specify
1727     `--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is fully enabled and
1728     warnings are not printed.  If you specify
1729     `--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
1730     mismatches are considered to be errors.  [This option is specific
1731     to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1732
1733`--leading-underscore'
1734`--no-leading-underscore'
1735     For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
1736     defined in target's description. By this option it is possible to
1737     disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
1738
1739`--export-all-symbols'
1740     If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
1741     will be exported by the DLL.  Note that this is the default if
1742     there otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols.  When symbols are
1743     explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
1744     function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
1745     unless this option is given.  Note that the symbols `DllMain@12',
1746     `DllEntryPoint@0', `DllMainCRTStartup@12', and `impure_ptr' will
1747     not be automatically exported.  Also, symbols imported from other
1748     DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the
1749     DLL's internal layout such as those beginning with `_head_' or
1750     ending with `_iname'.  In addition, no symbols from `libgcc',
1751     `libstd++', `libmingw32', or `crtX.o' will be exported.  Symbols
1752     whose names begin with `__rtti_' or `__builtin_' will not be
1753     exported, to help with C++ DLLs.  Finally, there is an extensive
1754     list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously,
1755     this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).  These
1756     cygwin-excludes are: `_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
1757     `_cygwin_crt0_common@8', `_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
1758     `_fmode', `_impure_ptr', `cygwin_attach_dll', `cygwin_premain0',
1759     `cygwin_premain1', `cygwin_premain2', `cygwin_premain3', and
1760     `environ'.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
1761     of the linker]
1762
1763`--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
1764     Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
1765     exported.  The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
1766     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1767     linker]
1768
1769`--exclude-all-symbols'
1770     Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.  [This
1771     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1772
1773`--file-alignment'
1774     Specify the file alignment.  Sections in the file will always
1775     begin at file offsets which are multiples of this number.  This
1776     defaults to 512.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted
1777     port of the linker]
1778
1779`--heap RESERVE'
1780`--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
1781     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
1782     commit) to be used as heap for this program.  The default is 1Mb
1783     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1784     targeted port of the linker]
1785
1786`--image-base VALUE'
1787     Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll.  This is the
1788     lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
1789     is loaded.  To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
1790     of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
1791     overlap any other dlls.  The default is 0x400000 for executables,
1792     and 0x10000000 for dlls.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1793     targeted port of the linker]
1794
1795`--kill-at'
1796     If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
1797     before they are exported.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1798     targeted port of the linker]
1799
1800`--large-address-aware'
1801     If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of
1802     the COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
1803     virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.  This should be used
1804     in conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in
1805     the "[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI.  Otherwise,
1806     this bit has no effect.  [This option is specific to PE targeted
1807     ports of the linker]
1808
1809`--major-image-version VALUE'
1810     Sets the major number of the "image version".  Defaults to 1.
1811     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1812     linker]
1813
1814`--major-os-version VALUE'
1815     Sets the major number of the "os version".  Defaults to 4.  [This
1816     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1817
1818`--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
1819     Sets the major number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 4.
1820     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1821     linker]
1822
1823`--minor-image-version VALUE'
1824     Sets the minor number of the "image version".  Defaults to 0.
1825     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1826     linker]
1827
1828`--minor-os-version VALUE'
1829     Sets the minor number of the "os version".  Defaults to 0.  [This
1830     option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1831
1832`--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
1833     Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version".  Defaults to 0.
1834     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1835     linker]
1836
1837`--output-def FILE'
1838     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
1839     corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating.  This DEF file
1840     (which should be called `*.def') may be used to create an import
1841     library with `dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
1842     automatically or implicitly exported symbols.  [This option is
1843     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
1844
1845`--out-implib FILE'
1846     The linker will create the file FILE which will contain an import
1847     lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This import
1848     lib (which should be called `*.dll.a' or `*.a' may be used to link
1849     clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour makes it
1850     possible to skip a separate `dlltool' import library creation step.
1851     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
1852     linker]
1853
1854`--enable-auto-image-base'
1855     Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is
1856     specified using the `--image-base' argument.  By using a hash
1857     generated from the dllname to create unique image bases for each
1858     DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
1859     execution are avoided.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
1860     targeted port of the linker]
1861
1862`--disable-auto-image-base'
1863     Do not automatically generate a unique image base.  If there is no
1864     user-specified image base (`--image-base') then use the platform
1865     default.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
1866     the linker]
1867
1868`--dll-search-prefix STRING'
1869     When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
1870     search for `<string><basename>.dll' in preference to
1871     `lib<basename>.dll'. This behaviour allows easy distinction
1872     between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
1873     uwin, pw, etc.  For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
1874     `--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.  [This option is specific to the i386
1875     PE targeted port of the linker]
1876
1877`--enable-auto-import'
1878     Do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to `__imp__symbol' for DATA
1879     imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
1880     building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use
1881     of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the
1882     image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
1883     PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
1884
1885     Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
1886     data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
1887     placed into the .data section instead.  This is in order to work
1888     around a problem with consts that is described here:
1889     http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
1890
1891     Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
1892     may see this message:
1893
1894     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
1895     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
1896
1897     This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
1898     ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
1899     only allow one).  Instances where this may occur include accesses
1900     to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
1901     as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
1902     DLL.  Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
1903     trigger this error condition.  However, regardless of the exact
1904     data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always
1905     detect it, issue the warning, and exit.
1906
1907     There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
1908     the data type of the exported variable:
1909
1910     One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
1911     the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
1912     environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
1913     supports this feature.
1914
1915     A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
1916     variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
1917     For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
1918     array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
1919     variable.  Thus:
1920
1921          extern type extern_array[];
1922          extern_array[1] -->
1923             { volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
1924
1925     or
1926
1927          extern type extern_array[];
1928          extern_array[1] -->
1929             { volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
1930
1931     For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
1932     is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
1933     variable:
1934
1935          extern struct s extern_struct;
1936          extern_struct.field -->
1937             { volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
1938
1939     or
1940
1941          extern long long extern_ll;
1942          extern_ll -->
1943            { volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
1944
1945     A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
1946     'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
1947     `__declspec(dllimport)'.  However, in practise that requires using
1948     compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
1949     building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
1950     building/linking to a static library.   In making the choice
1951     between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
1952     constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world
1953     usage:
1954
1955     Original:
1956          --foo.h
1957          extern int arr[];
1958          --foo.c
1959          #include "foo.h"
1960          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1961            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1962          }
1963
1964     Solution 1:
1965          --foo.h
1966          extern int arr[];
1967          --foo.c
1968          #include "foo.h"
1969          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1970            /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
1971            volatile int *parr = arr;
1972            printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
1973          }
1974
1975     Solution 2:
1976          --foo.h
1977          /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
1978          #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
1979            !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
1980          #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
1981          #else
1982          #define FOO_IMPORT
1983          #endif
1984          extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
1985          --foo.c
1986          #include "foo.h"
1987          void main(int argc, char **argv){
1988            printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
1989          }
1990
1991     A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
1992     use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
1993     offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
1994     functions).  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
1995     of the linker]
1996
1997`--disable-auto-import'
1998     Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of `_symbol' to
1999     `__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs.  [This option is
2000     specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2001
2002`--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
2003     If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
2004     section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
2005     switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
2006     can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
2007     data in your client code.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
2008     targeted port of the linker]
2009
2010`--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
2011     Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
2012     from DLLs.  This is the default.  [This option is specific to the
2013     i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2014
2015`--enable-extra-pe-debug'
2016     Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2017     [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
2018     linker]
2019
2020`--section-alignment'
2021     Sets the section alignment.  Sections in memory will always begin
2022     at addresses which are a multiple of this number.  Defaults to
2023     0x1000.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
2024     the linker]
2025
2026`--stack RESERVE'
2027`--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
2028     Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
2029     commit) to be used as stack for this program.  The default is 2Mb
2030     reserved, 4K committed.  [This option is specific to the i386 PE
2031     targeted port of the linker]
2032
2033`--subsystem WHICH'
2034`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
2035`--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
2036     Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute.  The
2037     legal values for WHICH are `native', `windows', `console',
2038     `posix', and `xbox'.  You may optionally set the subsystem version
2039     also.  Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH.  [This option
2040     is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2041
2042     The following options set flags in the `DllCharacteristics' field
2043     of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
2044     ports of the linker]
2045
2046`--dynamicbase'
2047     The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2048     randomization (ASLR).  This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2049     Vista for i386 PE targets.
2050
2051`--forceinteg'
2052     Code integrity checks are enforced.
2053
2054`--nxcompat'
2055     The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.  This
2056     feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2057
2058`--no-isolation'
2059     Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2060
2061`--no-seh'
2062     The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
2063     image.
2064
2065`--no-bind'
2066     Do not bind this image.
2067
2068`--wdmdriver'
2069     The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2070
2071`--tsaware'
2072     The image is Terminal Server aware.
2073
2074
20752.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2076---------------------------------------------
2077
2078The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
2079shared libraries.  Each shared library in the system needs to have a
2080unique index; all executables use an index of 0.
2081
2082`--dsbt-size SIZE'
2083     This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current
2084     executable or shared library to SIZE.  The default is to create a
2085     table with 64 entries.
2086
2087`--dsbt-index INDEX'
2088     This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or
2089     shared library to INDEX.  The default is 0, which is appropriate
2090     for generating executables.  If a shared library is generated with
2091     a DSBT index of 0, the `R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX' relocs are copied into
2092     the output file.
2093
2094     The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
2095     adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2096
2097
20982.1.3 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2099------------------------------------------------------------
2100
2101The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2102memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2103
2104`--no-trampoline'
2105     This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
2106     trampoline is generated for each far function which is called
2107     using a `jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far
2108     function is taken).
2109
2110`--bank-window NAME'
2111     This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
2112     in the `MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
2113     window.  The definition of such region is then used by the linker
2114     to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
2115
2116
21172.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2118---------------------------------------------
2119
2120The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
2121generation when linking for 68K targets.
2122
2123`--got=TYPE'
2124     This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2125     TYPE should be one of `single', `negative', `multigot' or
2126     `target'.  For more information refer to the Info entry for `ld'.
2127
2128
2129
2130File: ld.info,  Node: Environment,  Prev: Options,  Up: Invocation
2131
21322.2 Environment Variables
2133=========================
2134
2135You can change the behaviour of `ld' with the environment variables
2136`GNUTARGET', `LDEMULATION' and `COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
2137
2138   `GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
2139`-b' (or its synonym `--format').  Its value should be one of the BFD
2140names for an input format (*note BFD::).  If there is no `GNUTARGET' in
2141the environment, `ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
2142`GNUTARGET' is set to `default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
2143format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
2144there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
2145that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
2146However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
2147conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
2148ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
2149
2150   `LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2151`-m' option.  The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2152behaviour, particularly the default linker script.  You can list the
2153available emulations with the `--verbose' or `-V' options.  If the `-m'
2154option is not used, and the `LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
2155defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
2156configured.
2157
2158   Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols.  However, if
2159`COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default
2160to not demangling symbols.  This environment variable is used in a
2161similar fashion by the `gcc' linker wrapper program.  The default may
2162be overridden by the `--demangle' and `--no-demangle' options.
2163
2164
2165File: ld.info,  Node: Scripts,  Next: Machine Dependent,  Prev: Invocation,  Up: Top
2166
21673 Linker Scripts
2168****************
2169
2170Every link is controlled by a "linker script".  This script is written
2171in the linker command language.
2172
2173   The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the
2174sections in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and
2175to control the memory layout of the output file.  Most linker scripts
2176do nothing more than this.  However, when necessary, the linker script
2177can also direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the
2178commands described below.
2179
2180   The linker always uses a linker script.  If you do not supply one
2181yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2182linker executable.  You can use the `--verbose' command line option to
2183display the default linker script.  Certain command line options, such
2184as `-r' or `-N', will affect the default linker script.
2185
2186   You may supply your own linker script by using the `-T' command line
2187option.  When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
2188linker script.
2189
2190   You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
2191files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked.  *Note
2192Implicit Linker Scripts::.
2193
2194* Menu:
2195
2196* Basic Script Concepts::	Basic Linker Script Concepts
2197* Script Format::		Linker Script Format
2198* Simple Example::		Simple Linker Script Example
2199* Simple Commands::		Simple Linker Script Commands
2200* Assignments::			Assigning Values to Symbols
2201* SECTIONS::			SECTIONS Command
2202* MEMORY::			MEMORY Command
2203* PHDRS::			PHDRS Command
2204* VERSION::			VERSION Command
2205* Expressions::			Expressions in Linker Scripts
2206* Implicit Linker Scripts::	Implicit Linker Scripts
2207
2208
2209File: ld.info,  Node: Basic Script Concepts,  Next: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2210
22113.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
2212================================
2213
2214We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2215describe the linker script language.
2216
2217   The linker combines input files into a single output file.  The
2218output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2219"object file format".  Each file is called an "object file".  The
2220output file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we
2221will also call it an object file.  Each object file has, among other
2222things, a list of "sections".  We sometimes refer to a section in an
2223input file as an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output
2224file is an "output section".
2225
2226   Each section in an object file has a name and a size.  Most sections
2227also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
2228A section may be marked as "loadable", which mean that the contents
2229should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.  A section
2230with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
2231memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
2232there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out).  A section which
2233is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
2234debugging information.
2235
2236   Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses.  The
2237first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address.  This is the address the
2238section will have when the output file is run.  The second is the
2239"LMA", or load memory address.  This is the address at which the
2240section will be loaded.  In most cases the two addresses will be the
2241same.  An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2242is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2243(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2244based system).  In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2245RAM address would be the VMA.
2246
2247   You can see the sections in an object file by using the `objdump'
2248program with the `-h' option.
2249
2250   Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
2251table".  A symbol may be defined or undefined.  Each symbol has a name,
2252and each defined symbol has an address, among other information.  If
2253you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a
2254defined symbol for every defined function and global or static
2255variable.  Every undefined function or global variable which is
2256referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2257
2258   You can see the symbols in an object file by using the `nm' program,
2259or by using the `objdump' program with the `-t' option.
2260
2261
2262File: ld.info,  Node: Script Format,  Next: Simple Example,  Prev: Basic Script Concepts,  Up: Scripts
2263
22643.2 Linker Script Format
2265========================
2266
2267Linker scripts are text files.
2268
2269   You write a linker script as a series of commands.  Each command is
2270either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2271symbol.  You may separate commands using semicolons.  Whitespace is
2272generally ignored.
2273
2274   Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
2275directly.  If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
2276would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
2277in double quotes.  There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2278file name.
2279
2280   You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2281`/*' and `*/'.  As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
2282whitespace.
2283
2284
2285File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Example,  Next: Simple Commands,  Prev: Script Format,  Up: Scripts
2286
22873.3 Simple Linker Script Example
2288================================
2289
2290Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2291
2292   The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2293`SECTIONS'.  You use the `SECTIONS' command to describe the memory
2294layout of the output file.
2295
2296   The `SECTIONS' command is a powerful command.  Here we will describe
2297a simple use of it.  Let's assume your program consists only of code,
2298initialized data, and uninitialized data.  These will be in the
2299`.text', `.data', and `.bss' sections, respectively.  Let's assume
2300further that these are the only sections which appear in your input
2301files.
2302
2303   For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
23040x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000.  Here is a
2305linker script which will do that:
2306     SECTIONS
2307     {
2308       . = 0x10000;
2309       .text : { *(.text) }
2310       . = 0x8000000;
2311       .data : { *(.data) }
2312       .bss : { *(.bss) }
2313     }
2314
2315   You write the `SECTIONS' command as the keyword `SECTIONS', followed
2316by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
2317enclosed in curly braces.
2318
2319   The first line inside the `SECTIONS' command of the above example
2320sets the value of the special symbol `.', which is the location
2321counter.  If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2322other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2323current value of the location counter.  The location counter is then
2324incremented by the size of the output section.  At the start of the
2325`SECTIONS' command, the location counter has the value `0'.
2326
2327   The second line defines an output section, `.text'.  The colon is
2328required syntax which may be ignored for now.  Within the curly braces
2329after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2330which should be placed into this output section.  The `*' is a wildcard
2331which matches any file name.  The expression `*(.text)' means all
2332`.text' input sections in all input files.
2333
2334   Since the location counter is `0x10000' when the output section
2335`.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the `.text'
2336section in the output file to be `0x10000'.
2337
2338   The remaining lines define the `.data' and `.bss' sections in the
2339output file.  The linker will place the `.data' output section at
2340address `0x8000000'.  After the linker places the `.data' output
2341section, the value of the location counter will be `0x8000000' plus the
2342size of the `.data' output section.  The effect is that the linker will
2343place the `.bss' output section immediately after the `.data' output
2344section in memory.
2345
2346   The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2347alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary.  In this
2348example, the specified addresses for the `.text' and `.data' sections
2349will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may
2350have to create a small gap between the `.data' and `.bss' sections.
2351
2352   That's it!  That's a simple and complete linker script.
2353
2354
2355File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Commands,  Next: Assignments,  Prev: Simple Example,  Up: Scripts
2356
23573.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
2358=================================
2359
2360In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2361
2362* Menu:
2363
2364* Entry Point::			Setting the entry point
2365* File Commands::		Commands dealing with files
2366
2367* Format Commands::		Commands dealing with object file formats
2368
2369* REGION_ALIAS::		Assign alias names to memory regions
2370* Miscellaneous Commands::	Other linker script commands
2371
2372
2373File: ld.info,  Node: Entry Point,  Next: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2374
23753.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
2376-----------------------------
2377
2378The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
2379point".  You can use the `ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
2380point.  The argument is a symbol name:
2381     ENTRY(SYMBOL)
2382
2383   There are several ways to set the entry point.  The linker will set
2384the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2385stopping when one of them succeeds:
2386   * the `-e' ENTRY command-line option;
2387
2388   * the `ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
2389
2390   * the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined;  For many
2391     targets this is `start', but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2392     check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
2393     found.
2394
2395   * the address of the first byte of the `.text' section, if present;
2396
2397   * The address `0'.
2398
2399
2400File: ld.info,  Node: File Commands,  Next: Format Commands,  Prev: Entry Point,  Up: Simple Commands
2401
24023.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
2403---------------------------------
2404
2405Several linker script commands deal with files.
2406
2407`INCLUDE FILENAME'
2408     Include the linker script FILENAME at this point.  The file will
2409     be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
2410     specified with the `-L' option.  You can nest calls to `INCLUDE'
2411     up to 10 levels deep.
2412
2413     You can place `INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in `MEMORY' or
2414     `SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
2415
2416`INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2417`INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
2418     The `INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
2419     in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2420
2421     For example, if you always want to include `subr.o' any time you do
2422     a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
2423     line, then you can put `INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
2424
2425     In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
2426     linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a `-T'
2427     option.
2428
2429     In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
2430     with the `/' character, and the script being processed was located
2431     inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in
2432     the "sysroot prefix".  Otherwise, the linker will try to open the
2433     file in the current directory.  If it is not found, the linker
2434     will search through the archive library search path.  See the
2435     description of `-L' in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
2436
2437     If you use `INPUT (-lFILE)', `ld' will transform the name to
2438     `libFILE.a', as with the command line argument `-l'.
2439
2440     When you use the `INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
2441     files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2442     script file is included.  This can affect archive searching.
2443
2444`GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2445`GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
2446     The `GROUP' command is like `INPUT', except that the named files
2447     should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2448     new undefined references are created.  See the description of `-('
2449     in *Note Command Line Options: Options.
2450
2451`AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
2452`AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
2453     This construct can appear only inside of the `INPUT' or `GROUP'
2454     commands, among other filenames.  The files listed will be handled
2455     as if they appear directly in the `INPUT' or `GROUP' commands,
2456     with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2457     when they are actually needed.  This construct essentially enables
2458     `--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
2459     restores previous `--as-needed' resp. `--no-as-needed' setting
2460     afterwards.
2461
2462`OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
2463     The `OUTPUT' command names the output file.  Using
2464     `OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using `-o
2465     FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
2466     Options.).  If both are used, the command line option takes
2467     precedence.
2468
2469     You can use the `OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
2470     output file other than the usual default of `a.out'.
2471
2472`SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
2473     The `SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where `ld'
2474     looks for archive libraries.  Using `SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
2475     like using `-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command Line
2476     Options: Options.).  If both are used, then the linker will search
2477     both paths.  Paths specified using the command line option are
2478     searched first.
2479
2480`STARTUP(FILENAME)'
2481     The `STARTUP' command is just like the `INPUT' command, except
2482     that FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as
2483     though it were specified first on the command line.  This may be
2484     useful when using a system in which the entry point is always the
2485     start of the first file.
2486
2487
2488File: ld.info,  Node: Format Commands,  Next: REGION_ALIAS,  Prev: File Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2489
24903.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
2491-----------------------------------------------
2492
2493A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2494
2495`OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
2496`OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
2497     The `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
2498     output file (*note BFD::).  Using `OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
2499     exactly like using `--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2500     Command Line Options: Options.).  If both are used, the command
2501     line option takes precedence.
2502
2503     You can use `OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
2504     formats based on the `-EB' and `-EL' command line options.  This
2505     permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2506     desired endianness.
2507
2508     If neither `-EB' nor `-EL' are used, then the output format will
2509     be the first argument, DEFAULT.  If `-EB' is used, the output
2510     format will be the second argument, BIG.  If `-EL' is used, the
2511     output format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
2512
2513     For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target
2514     uses this command:
2515          OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2516     This says that the default format for the output file is
2517     `elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the `-EL' command line
2518     option, the output file will be created in the `elf32-littlemips'
2519     format.
2520
2521`TARGET(BFDNAME)'
2522     The `TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2523     files.  It affects subsequent `INPUT' and `GROUP' commands.  This
2524     command is like using `-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
2525     Command Line Options: Options.).  If the `TARGET' command is used
2526     but `OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last `TARGET' command is also
2527     used to set the format for the output file.  *Note BFD::.
2528
2529
2530File: ld.info,  Node: REGION_ALIAS,  Next: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: Format Commands,  Up: Simple Commands
2531
25323.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
2533------------------------------------------
2534
2535Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
2536*Note MEMORY:: command.  Each name corresponds to at most one memory
2537region.
2538
2539     REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
2540
2541   The `REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
2542memory region REGION.  This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
2543to memory regions.  An example follows.
2544
2545   Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
2546various memory storage devices.  All have a general purpose, volatile
2547memory `RAM' that allows code execution or data storage.  Some may have
2548a read-only, non-volatile memory `ROM' that allows code execution and
2549read-only data access.  The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
2550memory `ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
2551capability.  We have four output sections:
2552
2553   * `.text' program code;
2554
2555   * `.rodata' read-only data;
2556
2557   * `.data' read-write initialized data;
2558
2559   * `.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
2560
2561   The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
2562independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
2563part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
2564system.  Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
2565`A', `B' and `C':
2566Section            Variant A          Variant B          Variant C
2567.text              RAM                ROM                ROM
2568.rodata            RAM                ROM                ROM2
2569.data              RAM                RAM/ROM            RAM/ROM2
2570.bss               RAM                RAM                RAM
2571   The notation `RAM/ROM' or `RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
2572loaded into region `ROM' or `ROM2' respectively.  Please note that the
2573load address of the `.data' section starts in all three variants at the
2574end of the `.rodata' section.
2575
2576   The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
2577It includes the system dependent `linkcmds.memory' file that describes
2578the memory layout:
2579     INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
2580
2581     SECTIONS
2582       {
2583         .text :
2584           {
2585             *(.text)
2586           } > REGION_TEXT
2587         .rodata :
2588           {
2589             *(.rodata)
2590             rodata_end = .;
2591           } > REGION_RODATA
2592         .data : AT (rodata_end)
2593           {
2594             data_start = .;
2595             *(.data)
2596           } > REGION_DATA
2597         data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
2598         data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
2599         .bss :
2600           {
2601             *(.bss)
2602           } > REGION_BSS
2603       }
2604
2605   Now we need three different `linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
2606regions and alias names.  The content of `linkcmds.memory' for the three
2607variants `A', `B' and `C':
2608`A'
2609     Here everything goes into the `RAM'.
2610          MEMORY
2611            {
2612              RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
2613            }
2614
2615          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
2616          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
2617          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2618          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2619
2620`B'
2621     Program code and read-only data go into the `ROM'.  Read-write
2622     data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the initialized data is
2623     loaded into the `ROM' and will be copied during system start into
2624     the `RAM'.
2625          MEMORY
2626            {
2627              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
2628              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
2629            }
2630
2631          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
2632          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
2633          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2634          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2635
2636`C'
2637     Program code goes into the `ROM'.  Read-only data goes into the
2638     `ROM2'.  Read-write data goes into the `RAM'.  An image of the
2639     initialized data is loaded into the `ROM2' and will be copied
2640     during system start into the `RAM'.
2641          MEMORY
2642            {
2643              ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
2644              ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
2645              RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
2646            }
2647
2648          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
2649          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
2650          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
2651          REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
2652
2653   It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
2654copy the `.data' section from `ROM' or `ROM2' into the `RAM' if
2655necessary:
2656     #include <string.h>
2657
2658     extern char data_start [];
2659     extern char data_size [];
2660     extern char data_load_start [];
2661
2662     void copy_data(void)
2663     {
2664       if (data_start != data_load_start)
2665         {
2666           memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
2667         }
2668     }
2669
2670
2671File: ld.info,  Node: Miscellaneous Commands,  Prev: REGION_ALIAS,  Up: Simple Commands
2672
26733.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
2674----------------------------------
2675
2676There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2677
2678`ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
2679     Ensure that EXP is non-zero.  If it is zero, then exit the linker
2680     with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
2681
2682`EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
2683     Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2684     symbol.  Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2685     modules from standard libraries.  You may list several SYMBOLs for
2686     each `EXTERN', and you may use `EXTERN' multiple times.  This
2687     command has the same effect as the `-u' command-line option.
2688
2689`FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2690     This command has the same effect as the `-d' command-line option:
2691     to make `ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
2692     output file is specified (`-r').
2693
2694`INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
2695     This command has the same effect as the `--no-define-common'
2696     command-line option: to make `ld' omit the assignment of addresses
2697     to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2698
2699`INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
2700     This command is typically used in a script specified by `-T' to
2701     augment the default `SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays.  It
2702     inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2703     OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes `-T' to not override the default
2704     linker script.  The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2705     sections.  *Note Location Counter::.  The insertion happens after
2706     the linker has mapped input sections to output sections.  Prior to
2707     the insertion, since `-T' scripts are parsed before the default
2708     linker script, statements in the `-T' script occur before the
2709     default linker script statements in the internal linker
2710     representation of the script.  In particular, input section
2711     assignments will be made to `-T' output sections before those in
2712     the default script.  Here is an example of how a `-T' script using
2713     `INSERT' might look:
2714
2715          SECTIONS
2716          {
2717            OVERLAY :
2718            {
2719              .ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
2720              .ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
2721            }
2722          }
2723          INSERT AFTER .text;
2724
2725`NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
2726     This command may be used to tell `ld' to issue an error about any
2727     references among certain output sections.
2728
2729     In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2730     using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
2731     section will not be.  Any direct references between the two
2732     sections would be errors.  For example, it would be an error if
2733     code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
2734
2735     The `NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names.  If
2736     `ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
2737     an error and returns a non-zero exit status.  Note that the
2738     `NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
2739     names.
2740
2741`OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
2742     Specify a particular output machine architecture.  The argument is
2743     one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::).  You can
2744     see the architecture of an object file by using the `objdump'
2745     program with the `-f' option.
2746
2747`LD_FEATURE(STRING)'
2748     This command may be used to modify `ld' behavior.  If STRING is
2749     `"SANE_EXPR"' then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
2750     simply treated as numbers everywhere.  *Note Expression Section::.
2751
2752
2753File: ld.info,  Node: Assignments,  Next: SECTIONS,  Prev: Simple Commands,  Up: Scripts
2754
27553.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
2756===============================
2757
2758You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script.  This will define
2759the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
2760
2761* Menu:
2762
2763* Simple Assignments::		Simple Assignments
2764* HIDDEN::			HIDDEN
2765* PROVIDE::			PROVIDE
2766* PROVIDE_HIDDEN::		PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2767* Source Code Reference::	How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
2768
2769
2770File: ld.info,  Node: Simple Assignments,  Next: HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
2771
27723.5.1 Simple Assignments
2773------------------------
2774
2775You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
2776
2777`SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
2778`SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
2779`SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
2780`SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
2781`SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
2782`SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
2783`SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
2784`SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
2785`SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
2786
2787   The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION.  In
2788the other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
2789adjusted accordingly.
2790
2791   The special symbol name `.' indicates the location counter.  You may
2792only use this within a `SECTIONS' command.  *Note Location Counter::.
2793
2794   The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
2795
2796   Expressions are defined below; see *Note Expressions::.
2797
2798   You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
2799as statements within a `SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
2800section description in a `SECTIONS' command.
2801
2802   The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
2803expression; for more information, see *Note Expression Section::.
2804
2805   Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
2806assignments may be used:
2807
2808     floating_point = 0;
2809     SECTIONS
2810     {
2811       .text :
2812         {
2813           *(.text)
2814           _etext = .;
2815         }
2816       _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
2817       .data : { *(.data) }
2818     }
2819   In this example, the symbol `floating_point' will be defined as
2820zero.  The symbol `_etext' will be defined as the address following the
2821last `.text' input section.  The symbol `_bdata' will be defined as the
2822address following the `.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
2823boundary.
2824
2825
2826File: ld.info,  Node: HIDDEN,  Next: PROVIDE,  Prev: Simple Assignments,  Up: Assignments
2827
28283.5.2 HIDDEN
2829------------
2830
2831For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
2832exported.  The syntax is `HIDDEN(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
2833
2834   Here is the example from *Note Simple Assignments::, rewritten to use
2835`HIDDEN':
2836
2837     HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
2838     SECTIONS
2839     {
2840       .text :
2841         {
2842           *(.text)
2843           HIDDEN(_etext = .);
2844         }
2845       HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
2846       .data : { *(.data) }
2847     }
2848   In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this
2849module.
2850
2851
2852File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE,  Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Prev: HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
2853
28543.5.3 PROVIDE
2855-------------
2856
2857In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
2858only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
2859the link.  For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol `etext'.
2860However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use `etext' as a
2861function name without encountering an error.  The `PROVIDE' keyword may
2862be used to define a symbol, such as `etext', only if it is referenced
2863but not defined.  The syntax is `PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
2864
2865   Here is an example of using `PROVIDE' to define `etext':
2866     SECTIONS
2867     {
2868       .text :
2869         {
2870           *(.text)
2871           _etext = .;
2872           PROVIDE(etext = .);
2873         }
2874     }
2875
2876   In this example, if the program defines `_etext' (with a leading
2877underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error.  If, on
2878the other hand, the program defines `etext' (with no leading
2879underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
2880If the program references `etext' but does not define it, the linker
2881will use the definition in the linker script.
2882
2883
2884File: ld.info,  Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Next: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE,  Up: Assignments
2885
28863.5.4 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
2887--------------------
2888
2889Similar to `PROVIDE'.  For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
2890hidden and won't be exported.
2891
2892
2893File: ld.info,  Node: Source Code Reference,  Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN,  Up: Assignments
2894
28953.5.5 Source Code Reference
2896---------------------------
2897
2898Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
2899intuitive.  In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
2900variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
2901that does not have a value.
2902
2903   Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
2904transform names in the source code into different names when they are
2905stored in the symbol table.  For example, Fortran compilers commonly
2906prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive `name
2907mangling'.  Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of
2908a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
2909variable as it is defined in a linker script.  For example in C a
2910linker script variable might be referred to as:
2911
2912       extern int foo;
2913
2914   But in the linker script it might be defined as:
2915
2916       _foo = 1000;
2917
2918   In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
2919transformation has taken place.
2920
2921   When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
2922things happen.  The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
2923the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol.  The second is
2924that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
2925holds the symbol's _address_.  ie the symbol table contains the address
2926of the block of memory holding the symbol's value.  So for example the
2927following C declaration, at file scope:
2928
2929       int foo = 1000;
2930
2931   creates a entry called `foo' in the symbol table.  This entry holds
2932the address of an `int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
2933initially stored.
2934
2935   When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
2936first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
2937memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
2938So:
2939
2940       foo = 1;
2941
2942   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
2943associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
2944address.  Whereas:
2945
2946       int * a = & foo;
2947
2948   looks up the symbol `foo' in the symbol table, gets it address and
2949then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
2950variable `a'.
2951
2952   Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
2953the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them.  Thus they are
2954an address without a value.  So for example the linker script
2955definition:
2956
2957       foo = 1000;
2958
2959   creates an entry in the symbol table called `foo' which holds the
2960address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
2961address 1000.  This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a
2962linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
2963access the _address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
2964
2965   Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
2966code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never
2967attempt to use its value.  For example suppose you want to copy the
2968contents of a section of memory called .ROM into a section called
2969.FLASH and the linker script contains these declarations:
2970
2971       start_of_ROM   = .ROM;
2972       end_of_ROM     = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
2973       start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
2974
2975   Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
2976
2977       extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
2978
2979       memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
2980
2981   Note the use of the `&' operators.  These are correct.
2982
2983
2984File: ld.info,  Node: SECTIONS,  Next: MEMORY,  Prev: Assignments,  Up: Scripts
2985
29863.6 SECTIONS Command
2987====================
2988
2989The `SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
2990output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
2991
2992   The format of the `SECTIONS' command is:
2993     SECTIONS
2994     {
2995       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2996       SECTIONS-COMMAND
2997       ...
2998     }
2999
3000   Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
3001
3002   * an `ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
3003
3004   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
3005
3006   * an output section description
3007
3008   * an overlay description
3009
3010   The `ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3011`SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
3012those commands.  This can also make the linker script easier to
3013understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3014the layout of the output file.
3015
3016   Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3017below.
3018
3019   If you do not use a `SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
3020linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3021section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3022input files.  If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3023example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3024in the first input file.  The first section will be at address zero.
3025
3026* Menu:
3027
3028* Output Section Description::	Output section description
3029* Output Section Name::		Output section name
3030* Output Section Address::	Output section address
3031* Input Section::		Input section description
3032* Output Section Data::		Output section data
3033* Output Section Keywords::	Output section keywords
3034* Output Section Discarding::	Output section discarding
3035* Output Section Attributes::	Output section attributes
3036* Overlay Description::		Overlay description
3037
3038
3039File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Description,  Next: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
3040
30413.6.1 Output Section Description
3042--------------------------------
3043
3044The full description of an output section looks like this:
3045     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
3046       [AT(LMA)]
3047       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
3048       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
3049       [CONSTRAINT]
3050       {
3051         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3052         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3053         ...
3054       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
3055
3056   Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
3057attributes.
3058
3059   The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
3060is unambiguous.  The colon and the curly braces are also required.  The
3061line breaks and other white space are optional.
3062
3063   Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
3064
3065   * a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
3066
3067   * an input section description (*note Input Section::)
3068
3069   * data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
3070
3071   * a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
3072
3073
3074File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Name,  Next: Output Section Address,  Prev: Output Section Description,  Up: SECTIONS
3075
30763.6.2 Output Section Name
3077-------------------------
3078
3079The name of the output section is SECTION.  SECTION must meet the
3080constraints of your output format.  In formats which only support a
3081limited number of sections, such as `a.out', the name must be one of
3082the names supported by the format (`a.out', for example, allows only
3083`.text', `.data' or `.bss'). If the output format supports any number
3084of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
3085the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string.  A section name
3086may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains
3087any unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
3088
3089   The output section name `/DISCARD/' is special; *Note Output Section
3090Discarding::.
3091
3092
3093File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Address,  Next: Input Section,  Prev: Output Section Name,  Up: SECTIONS
3094
30953.6.3 Output Section Address
3096----------------------------
3097
3098The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address)
3099of the output section.  This address is optional, but if it is provided
3100then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3101
3102   If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
3103the section, based on the heuristic below.  This address will be
3104adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section.  The
3105alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3106contained within the output section.
3107
3108   The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3109
3110   * If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
3111     to this region and its address will be the next free address in
3112     that region.
3113
3114   * If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3115     regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
3116     the section is selected to contain it.  The section's output
3117     address will be the next free address in that region; *Note
3118     MEMORY::.
3119
3120   * If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3121     the output address will be based on the current value of the
3122     location counter.
3123
3124For example:
3125
3126     .text . : { *(.text) }
3127
3128and
3129
3130     .text : { *(.text) }
3131
3132are subtly different.  The first will set the address of the `.text'
3133output section to the current value of the location counter.  The
3134second will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned
3135to the strictest alignment of any of the `.text' input sections.
3136
3137   The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *Note Expressions::.
3138For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3139so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3140do something like this:
3141     .text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
3142   This works because `ALIGN' returns the current location counter
3143aligned upward to the specified value.
3144
3145   Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
3146location counter, provided that the section is non-empty.  (Empty
3147sections are ignored).
3148
3149
3150File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section,  Next: Output Section Data,  Prev: Output Section Address,  Up: SECTIONS
3151
31523.6.4 Input Section Description
3153-------------------------------
3154
3155The most common output section command is an input section description.
3156
3157   The input section description is the most basic linker script
3158operation.  You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
3159your program in memory.  You use input section descriptions to tell the
3160linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
3161
3162* Menu:
3163
3164* Input Section Basics::	Input section basics
3165* Input Section Wildcards::	Input section wildcard patterns
3166* Input Section Common::	Input section for common symbols
3167* Input Section Keep::		Input section and garbage collection
3168* Input Section Example::	Input section example
3169
3170
3171File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Basics,  Next: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
3172
31733.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
3174............................
3175
3176An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3177by a list of section names in parentheses.
3178
3179   The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3180describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
3181
3182   The most common input section description is to include all input
3183sections with a particular name in the output section.  For example, to
3184include all input `.text' sections, you would write:
3185     *(.text)
3186   Here the `*' is a wildcard which matches any file name.  To exclude
3187a list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may
3188be used to match all files except the ones specified in the
3189EXCLUDE_FILE list.  For example:
3190     *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
3191   will cause all .ctors sections from all files except `crtend.o' and
3192`otherfile.o' to be included.
3193
3194   There are two ways to include more than one section:
3195     *(.text .rdata)
3196     *(.text) *(.rdata)
3197   The difference between these is the order in which the `.text' and
3198`.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section.  In the
3199first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3200they are found in the linker input.  In the second example, all `.text'
3201input sections will appear first, followed by all `.rdata' input
3202sections.
3203
3204   You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
3205file.  You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
3206data that needs to be at a particular location in memory.  For example:
3207     data.o(.data)
3208
3209   To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3210of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3211
3212   Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
3213sections:
3214
3215     SECTIONS {
3216       .text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
3217       .text2 :  { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
3218     }
3219
3220   In this example, the output section `.text' will be comprised of any
3221input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3222`SHF_MERGE' and `SHF_STRINGS' are set.  The output section `.text2'
3223will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
3224section header flag `SHF_WRITE' is clear.
3225
3226   You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3227matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
3228no whitespace around the colon.
3229
3230`archive:file'
3231     matches file within archive
3232
3233`archive:'
3234     matches the whole archive
3235
3236`:file'
3237     matches file but not one in an archive
3238
3239   Either one or both of `archive' and `file' can contain shell
3240wildcards.  On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3241single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so `c:myfile.o'
3242is a simple file specification, not `myfile.o' within an archive called
3243`c'.  `archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an
3244`EXCLUDE_FILE' list, but may not appear in other linker script
3245contexts.  For instance, you cannot extract a file from an archive by
3246using `archive:file' in an `INPUT' command.
3247
3248   If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
3249in the input file will be included in the output section.  This is not
3250commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion.  For example:
3251     data.o
3252
3253   When you use a file name which is not an `archive:file' specifier
3254and does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first
3255see if you also specified the file name on the linker command line or
3256in an `INPUT' command.  If you did not, the linker will attempt to open
3257the file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line.
3258Note that this differs from an `INPUT' command, because the linker will
3259not search for the file in the archive search path.
3260
3261
3262File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Wildcards,  Next: Input Section Common,  Prev: Input Section Basics,  Up: Input Section
3263
32643.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
3265.......................................
3266
3267In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3268name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3269
3270   The file name of `*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3271pattern for the file name.
3272
3273   The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3274
3275`*'
3276     matches any number of characters
3277
3278`?'
3279     matches any single character
3280
3281`[CHARS]'
3282     matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the `-' character
3283     may be used to specify a range of characters, as in `[a-z]' to
3284     match any lower case letter
3285
3286`\'
3287     quotes the following character
3288
3289   When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3290will not match a `/' character (used to separate directory names on
3291Unix).  A pattern consisting of a single `*' character is an exception;
3292it will always match any file name, whether it contains a `/' or not.
3293In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a `/' character.
3294
3295   File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3296specified on the command line or in an `INPUT' command.  The linker
3297does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3298
3299   If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
3300name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
3301linker will use the first match in the linker script.  For example, this
3302sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3303`data.o' rule will not be used:
3304     .data : { *(.data) }
3305     .data1 : { data.o(.data) }
3306
3307   Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
3308wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link.  You can
3309change this by using the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
3310wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., `SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)').  When
3311the `SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
3312sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
3313file.
3314
3315   `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
3316difference is `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into ascending
3317order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3318
3319   `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' is very similar to `SORT_BY_NAME'. The
3320difference is `SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' will sort sections into ascending
3321order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in
3322the section name before placing them in the output file.
3323
3324   `SORT' is an alias for `SORT_BY_NAME'.
3325
3326   When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
3327there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3328
3329  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
3330     It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment
3331     if 2 sections have the same name.
3332
3333  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
3334     It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name
3335     if 2 sections have the same alignment.
3336
3337  3. `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
3338     treated the same as `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
3339
3340  4. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
3341     pattern)) is treated the same as `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
3342     section pattern).
3343
3344  5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3345
3346   When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3347section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
3348precedence over the command line option.
3349
3350   If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3351command line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
3352as nested sorting command.
3353
3354  1. `SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with `--sort-sections
3355     alignment' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_NAME' (`SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
3356     (wildcard section pattern)).
3357
3358  2. `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with
3359     `--sort-section name' is equivalent to `SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
3360     (`SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
3361
3362   If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3363command line option will be ignored.
3364
3365   `SORT_NONE' disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
3366section sorting option.
3367
3368   If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
3369the `-M' linker option to generate a map file.  The map file shows
3370precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3371
3372   This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3373files.  This linker script directs the linker to place all `.text'
3374sections in `.text' and all `.bss' sections in `.bss'.  The linker will
3375place the `.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
3376character in `.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
3377`.data' section in `.data'.
3378     SECTIONS {
3379       .text : { *(.text) }
3380       .DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
3381       .data : { *(.data) }
3382       .bss : { *(.bss) }
3383     }
3384
3385
3386File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Common,  Next: Input Section Keep,  Prev: Input Section Wildcards,  Up: Input Section
3387
33883.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
3389........................................
3390
3391A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3392file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section.  The
3393linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3394named `COMMON'.
3395
3396   You may use file names with the `COMMON' section just as with any
3397other input sections.  You can use this to place common symbols from a
3398particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3399input files are placed in another section.
3400
3401   In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3402`.bss' section in the output file.  For example:
3403     .bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
3404
3405   Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
3406For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
3407common symbols and small common symbols.  In this case, the linker will
3408use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
3409In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses `COMMON' for standard common
3410symbols and `.scommon' for small common symbols.  This permits you to
3411map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3412locations.
3413
3414   You will sometimes see `[COMMON]' in old linker scripts.  This
3415notation is now considered obsolete.  It is equivalent to `*(COMMON)'.
3416
3417
3418File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Keep,  Next: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Common,  Up: Input Section
3419
34203.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
3421............................................
3422
3423When link-time garbage collection is in use (`--gc-sections'), it is
3424often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.  This is
3425accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
3426`KEEP()', as in `KEEP(*(.init))' or `KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
3427
3428
3429File: ld.info,  Node: Input Section Example,  Prev: Input Section Keep,  Up: Input Section
3430
34313.6.4.5 Input Section Example
3432.............................
3433
3434The following example is a complete linker script.  It tells the linker
3435to read all of the sections from file `all.o' and place them at the
3436start of output section `outputa' which starts at location `0x10000'.
3437All of section `.input1' from file `foo.o' follows immediately, in the
3438same output section.  All of section `.input2' from `foo.o' goes into
3439output section `outputb', followed by section `.input1' from `foo1.o'.
3440All of the remaining `.input1' and `.input2' sections from any files
3441are written to output section `outputc'.
3442
3443     SECTIONS {
3444       outputa 0x10000 :
3445         {
3446         all.o
3447         foo.o (.input1)
3448         }
3449       outputb :
3450         {
3451         foo.o (.input2)
3452         foo1.o (.input1)
3453         }
3454       outputc :
3455         {
3456         *(.input1)
3457         *(.input2)
3458         }
3459     }
3460
3461
3462File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Data,  Next: Output Section Keywords,  Prev: Input Section,  Up: SECTIONS
3463
34643.6.5 Output Section Data
3465-------------------------
3466
3467You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3468`BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', `QUAD', or `SQUAD' as an output section
3469command.  Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
3470providing the value to store (*note Expressions::).  The value of the
3471expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
3472
3473   The `BYTE', `SHORT', `LONG', and `QUAD' commands store one, two,
3474four, and eight bytes (respectively).  After storing the bytes, the
3475location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
3476
3477   For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
3478value of the symbol `addr':
3479     BYTE(1)
3480     LONG(addr)
3481
3482   When using a 64 bit host or target, `QUAD' and `SQUAD' are the same;
3483they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value.  When both host and target
3484are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits.  In this case `QUAD'
3485stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and `SQUAD' stores a 32
3486bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3487
3488   If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
3489endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
3490endianness.  When the object file format does not have an explicit
3491endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
3492stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
3493
3494   Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
3495between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3496     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
3497   whereas this will work:
3498     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
3499
3500   You may use the `FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
3501current section.  It is followed by an expression in parentheses.  Any
3502otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3503gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
3504with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary.  A `FILL'
3505statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
3506the section definition; by including more than one `FILL' statement,
3507you can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
3508section.
3509
3510   This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
3511value `0x90':
3512     FILL(0x90909090)
3513
3514   The `FILL' command is similar to the `=FILLEXP' output section
3515attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
3516`FILL' command, rather than the entire section.  If both are used, the
3517`FILL' command takes precedence.  *Note Output Section Fill::, for
3518details on the fill expression.
3519
3520
3521File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Keywords,  Next: Output Section Discarding,  Prev: Output Section Data,  Up: SECTIONS
3522
35233.6.6 Output Section Keywords
3524-----------------------------
3525
3526There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3527commands.
3528
3529`CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
3530     The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
3531     file.  The name of each symbol will be the name of the
3532     corresponding input file.  The section of each symbol will be the
3533     output section in which the `CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
3534     appears.
3535
3536     This is conventional for the a.out object file format.  It is not
3537     normally used for any other object file format.
3538
3539`CONSTRUCTORS'
3540     When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3541     unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3542     destructors.  When linking object file formats which do not support
3543     arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3544     automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
3545     name.  For these object file formats, the `CONSTRUCTORS' command
3546     tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
3547     section where the `CONSTRUCTORS' command appears.  The
3548     `CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
3549
3550     The symbol `__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
3551     constructors, and the symbol `__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
3552     Similarly, `__DTOR_LIST__' and `__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
3553     end of the global destructors.  The first word in the list is the
3554     number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
3555     destructor, followed by a zero word.  The compiler must arrange to
3556     actually run the code.  For these object file formats GNU C++
3557     normally calls constructors from a subroutine `__main'; a call to
3558     `__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
3559     `main'.  GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
3560     `atexit', or directly from the function `exit'.
3561
3562     For object file formats such as `COFF' or `ELF' which support
3563     arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
3564     addresses of global constructors and destructors into the `.ctors'
3565     and `.dtors' sections.  Placing the following sequence into your
3566     linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
3567     runtime code expects to see.
3568
3569                __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3570                LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3571                *(.ctors)
3572                LONG(0)
3573                __CTOR_END__ = .;
3574                __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3575                LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3576                *(.dtors)
3577                LONG(0)
3578                __DTOR_END__ = .;
3579
3580     If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
3581     which provides some control over the order in which global
3582     constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
3583     to ensure that they are executed in the correct order.  When using
3584     the `CONSTRUCTORS' command, use `SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
3585     instead.  When using the `.ctors' and `.dtors' sections, use
3586     `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and `*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
3587     just `*(.ctors)' and `*(.dtors)'.
3588
3589     Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
3590     automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with
3591     them.  However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++
3592     and writing your own linker scripts.
3593
3594
3595
3596File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Discarding,  Next: Output Section Attributes,  Prev: Output Section Keywords,  Up: SECTIONS
3597
35983.6.7 Output Section Discarding
3599-------------------------------
3600
3601The linker will not create output sections with no contents.  This is
3602for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not be
3603present in any of the input files.  For example:
3604     .foo : { *(.foo) }
3605   will only create a `.foo' section in the output file if there is a
3606`.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections
3607are not all empty.  Other link script directives that allocate space in
3608an output section will also create the output section.
3609
3610   The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
3611Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
3612defines symbols in the output section.  In that case the linker will
3613obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3614section is discarded.
3615
3616   The special output section name `/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
3617input sections.  Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3618section named `/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
3619
3620
3621File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Attributes,  Next: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Discarding,  Up: SECTIONS
3622
36233.6.8 Output Section Attributes
3624-------------------------------
3625
3626We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3627like this:
3628
3629     SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
3630       [AT(LMA)]
3631       [ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN)]
3632       [SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
3633       [CONSTRAINT]
3634       {
3635         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3636         OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3637         ...
3638       } [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
3639
3640   We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and
3641OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.  In this section we will describe the remaining
3642section attributes.
3643
3644* Menu:
3645
3646* Output Section Type::		Output section type
3647* Output Section LMA::		Output section LMA
3648* Forced Output Alignment::	Forced Output Alignment
3649* Forced Input Alignment::	Forced Input Alignment
3650* Output Section Constraint::   Output section constraint
3651* Output Section Region::	Output section region
3652* Output Section Phdr::		Output section phdr
3653* Output Section Fill::		Output section fill
3654
3655
3656File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Type,  Next: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3657
36583.6.8.1 Output Section Type
3659...........................
3660
3661Each output section may have a type.  The type is a keyword in
3662parentheses.  The following types are defined:
3663
3664`NOLOAD'
3665     The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
3666     be loaded into memory when the program is run.
3667
3668`DSECT'
3669`COPY'
3670`INFO'
3671`OVERLAY'
3672     These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3673     rarely used.  They all have the same effect: the section should be
3674     marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3675     section when the program is run.
3676
3677   The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3678the input sections which map into it.  You can override this by using
3679the section type.  For example, in the script sample below, the `ROM'
3680section is addressed at memory location `0' and does not need to be
3681loaded when the program is run.
3682     SECTIONS {
3683       ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
3684       ...
3685     }
3686
3687
3688File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section LMA,  Next: Forced Output Alignment,  Prev: Output Section Type,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3689
36903.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
3691..........................
3692
3693Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3694*Note Basic Script Concepts::.  The virtual address is specified by the
3695*note Output Section Address:: described earlier.  The load address is
3696specified by the `AT' or `AT>' keywords.  Specifying a load address is
3697optional.
3698
3699   The `AT' keyword takes an expression as an argument.  This specifies
3700the exact load address of the section.  The `AT>' keyword takes the
3701name of a memory region as an argument.  *Note MEMORY::.  The load
3702address of the section is set to the next free address in the region,
3703aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
3704
3705   If neither `AT' nor `AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
3706the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
3707address:
3708
3709   * If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
3710     the LMA address as well.
3711
3712   * If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
3713
3714   * Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
3715     the current section, and this region contains at least one
3716     section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and
3717     LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the
3718     last section in the located region.
3719
3720   * If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
3721     covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
3722
3723   * If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
3724     section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
3725
3726   This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image.  For
3727example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3728called `.text', which starts at `0x1000', one called `.mdata', which is
3729loaded at the end of the `.text' section even though its VMA is
3730`0x2000', and one called `.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
3731`0x3000'.  The symbol `_data' is defined with the value `0x2000', which
3732shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3733
3734     SECTIONS
3735       {
3736       .text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
3737       .mdata 0x2000 :
3738         AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
3739         { _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ;  }
3740       .bss 0x3000 :
3741         { _bstart = . ;  *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
3742     }
3743
3744   The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
3745with this linker script would include something like the following, to
3746copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
3747Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
3748linker script.
3749
3750     extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
3751     char *src = &_etext;
3752     char *dst = &_data;
3753
3754     /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it.  */
3755     while (dst < &_edata)
3756       *dst++ = *src++;
3757
3758     /* Zero bss.  */
3759     for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
3760       *dst = 0;
3761
3762
3763File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Output Alignment,  Next: Forced Input Alignment,  Prev: Output Section LMA,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3764
37653.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
3766...............................
3767
3768You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
3769
3770
3771File: ld.info,  Node: Forced Input Alignment,  Next: Output Section Constraint,  Prev: Forced Output Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3772
37733.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
3774..............................
3775
3776You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
3777SUBALIGN.  The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
3778sections, whether larger or smaller.
3779
3780
3781File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Constraint,  Next: Output Section Region,  Prev: Forced Input Alignment,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3782
37833.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
3784.................................
3785
3786You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
3787its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
3788read-write by using the keyword `ONLY_IF_RO' and `ONLY_IF_RW'
3789respectively.
3790
3791
3792File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Region,  Next: Output Section Phdr,  Prev: Output Section Constraint,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3793
37943.6.8.6 Output Section Region
3795.............................
3796
3797You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
3798using `>REGION'.  *Note MEMORY::.
3799
3800   Here is a simple example:
3801     MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
3802     SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
3803
3804
3805File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Phdr,  Next: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Region,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3806
38073.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
3808...........................
3809
3810You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
3811using `:PHDR'.  *Note PHDRS::.  If a section is assigned to one or more
3812segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
3813those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly `:PHDR' modifier.
3814You can use `:NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
3815segment at all.
3816
3817   Here is a simple example:
3818     PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
3819     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
3820
3821
3822File: ld.info,  Node: Output Section Fill,  Prev: Output Section Phdr,  Up: Output Section Attributes
3823
38243.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
3825...........................
3826
3827You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using `=FILLEXP'.
3828FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::).  Any otherwise
3829unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
3830gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
3831filled with the value, repeated as necessary.  If the fill expression
3832is a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with `0x'
3833and without a trailing `k' or `M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of
3834hex digits can be used to specify the fill pattern;  Leading zeros
3835become part of the pattern too.  For all other cases, including extra
3836parentheses or a unary `+', the fill pattern is the four least
3837significant bytes of the value of the expression.  In all cases, the
3838number is big-endian.
3839
3840   You can also change the fill value with a `FILL' command in the
3841output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
3842
3843   Here is a simple example:
3844     SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
3845
3846
3847File: ld.info,  Node: Overlay Description,  Prev: Output Section Attributes,  Up: SECTIONS
3848
38493.6.9 Overlay Description
3850-------------------------
3851
3852An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
3853are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
3854the same memory address.  At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
3855copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
3856required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits.  This approach
3857can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
3858than another.
3859
3860   Overlays are described using the `OVERLAY' command.  The `OVERLAY'
3861command is used within a `SECTIONS' command, like an output section
3862description.  The full syntax of the `OVERLAY' command is as follows:
3863     OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
3864       {
3865         SECNAME1
3866           {
3867             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3868             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3869             ...
3870           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3871         SECNAME2
3872           {
3873             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3874             OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
3875             ...
3876           } [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3877         ...
3878       } [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
3879
3880   Everything is optional except `OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each
3881section must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above).  The section
3882definitions within the `OVERLAY' construct are identical to those
3883within the general `SECTIONS' contruct (*note SECTIONS::), except that
3884no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for sections within
3885an `OVERLAY'.
3886
3887   The sections are all defined with the same starting address.  The
3888load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
3889consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
3890`OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
3891address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
3892address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
3893location counter).
3894
3895   If the `NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there any references among
3896the sections, the linker will report an error.  Since the sections all
3897run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
3898section to refer directly to another.  *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
3899Commands.
3900
3901   For each section within the `OVERLAY', the linker automatically
3902provides two symbols.  The symbol `__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
3903the starting load address of the section.  The symbol
3904`__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
3905section.  Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
3906identifiers are removed.  C (or assembler) code may use these symbols
3907to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
3908
3909   At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
3910to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
3911section.
3912
3913   Here is an example.  Remember that this would appear inside a
3914`SECTIONS' construct.
3915       OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
3916        {
3917          .text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
3918          .text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
3919        }
3920This will define both `.text0' and `.text1' to start at address
39210x1000.  `.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and `.text1' will
3922be loaded immediately after `.text0'.  The following symbols will be
3923defined if referenced: `__load_start_text0', `__load_stop_text0',
3924`__load_start_text1', `__load_stop_text1'.
3925
3926   C code to copy overlay `.text1' into the overlay area might look
3927like the following.
3928
3929       extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
3930       memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
3931               &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
3932
3933   Note that the `OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
3934everything it does can be done using the more basic commands.  The above
3935example could have been written identically as follows.
3936
3937       .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
3938       PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
3939       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
3940       .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
3941       PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
3942       PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
3943       . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
3944
3945
3946File: ld.info,  Node: MEMORY,  Next: PHDRS,  Prev: SECTIONS,  Up: Scripts
3947
39483.7 MEMORY Command
3949==================
3950
3951The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
3952memory.  You can override this by using the `MEMORY' command.
3953
3954   The `MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
3955memory in the target.  You can use it to describe which memory regions
3956may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid.  You
3957can then assign sections to particular memory regions.  The linker will
3958set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
3959regions that become too full.  The linker will not shuffle sections
3960around to fit into the available regions.
3961
3962   A linker script may contain at most one use of the `MEMORY' command.
3963However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as you
3964wish.  The syntax is:
3965     MEMORY
3966       {
3967         NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
3968         ...
3969       }
3970
3971   The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
3972The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.  Region
3973names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
3974symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each memory region must
3975have a distinct name within the `MEMORY' command.  However you can add
3976later alias names to existing memory regions with the *Note
3977REGION_ALIAS:: command.
3978
3979   The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
3980whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
3981not explicitly mapped in the linker script.  As described in *Note
3982SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
3983section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
3984the input section.  If you define region attributes, the linker will use
3985them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
3986
3987   The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
3988`R'
3989     Read-only section
3990
3991`W'
3992     Read/write section
3993
3994`X'
3995     Executable section
3996
3997`A'
3998     Allocatable section
3999
4000`I'
4001     Initialized section
4002
4003`L'
4004     Same as `I'
4005
4006`!'
4007     Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
4008
4009   If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4010`!', it will be placed in the memory region.  The `!' attribute
4011reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed in the
4012memory region only if it does not match any of the listed attributes.
4013
4014   The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
4015memory region.  The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4016cannot involve any symbols.  The keyword `ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to
4017`org' or `o' (but not, for example, `ORG').
4018
4019   The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
4020As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only
4021and must evaluate to a constant.  The keyword `LENGTH' may be
4022abbreviated to `len' or `l'.
4023
4024   In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
4025regions available for allocation: one starting at `0' for 256 kilobytes,
4026and the other starting at `0x40000000' for four megabytes.  The linker
4027will place into the `rom' memory region every section which is not
4028explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
4029executable.  The linker will place other sections which are not
4030explicitly mapped into a memory region into the `ram' memory region.
4031
4032     MEMORY
4033       {
4034         rom (rx)  : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4035         ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4036       }
4037
4038   Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4039specific output sections into that memory region by using the `>REGION'
4040output section attribute.  For example, if you have a memory region
4041named `mem', you would use `>mem' in the output section definition.
4042*Note Output Section Region::.  If no address was specified for the
4043output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
4044address within the memory region.  If the combined output sections
4045directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
4046will issue an error message.
4047
4048   It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
4049expression via the `ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and `LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
4050
4051       _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
4052
4053
4054File: ld.info,  Node: PHDRS,  Next: VERSION,  Prev: MEMORY,  Up: Scripts
4055
40563.8 PHDRS Command
4057=================
4058
4059The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
4060"segments".  The program headers describe how the program should be
4061loaded into memory.  You can print them out by using the `objdump'
4062program with the `-p' option.
4063
4064   When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4065reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4066program.  This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4067This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4068interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4069
4070   The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
4071However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4072precisely.  You may use the `PHDRS' command for this purpose.  When the
4073linker sees the `PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not
4074create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4075
4076   The linker only pays attention to the `PHDRS' command when
4077generating an ELF output file.  In other cases, the linker will simply
4078ignore `PHDRS'.
4079
4080   This is the syntax of the `PHDRS' command.  The words `PHDRS',
4081`FILEHDR', `AT', and `FLAGS' are keywords.
4082
4083     PHDRS
4084     {
4085       NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
4086             [ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
4087     }
4088
4089   The NAME is used only for reference in the `SECTIONS' command of the
4090linker script.  It is not put into the output file.  Program header
4091names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
4092symbol names, file names, or section names.  Each program header must
4093have a distinct name.  The headers are processed in order and it is
4094usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
4095
4096   Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4097system loader will load from the file.  In the linker script, you
4098specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4099sections in the segments.  You use the `:PHDR' output section attribute
4100to place a section in a particular segment.  *Note Output Section
4101Phdr::.
4102
4103   It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment.  This
4104merely implies that one segment of memory contains another.  You may
4105repeat `:PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
4106section.
4107
4108   If you place a section in one or more segments using `:PHDR', then
4109the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
4110specify `:PHDR' in the same segments.  This is for convenience, since
4111generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
4112segment.  You can use `:NONE' to override the default segment and tell
4113the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4114
4115   You may use the `FILEHDR' and `PHDRS' keywords after the program
4116header type to further describe the contents of the segment.  The
4117`FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
4118header.  The `PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
4119ELF program headers themselves.  If applied to a loadable segment
4120(`PT_LOAD'), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
4121keywords.
4122
4123   The TYPE may be one of the following.  The numbers indicate the
4124value of the keyword.
4125
4126`PT_NULL' (0)
4127     Indicates an unused program header.
4128
4129`PT_LOAD' (1)
4130     Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be
4131     loaded from the file.
4132
4133`PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
4134     Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4135
4136`PT_INTERP' (3)
4137     Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
4138     be found.
4139
4140`PT_NOTE' (4)
4141     Indicates a segment holding note information.
4142
4143`PT_SHLIB' (5)
4144     A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
4145     ELF ABI.
4146
4147`PT_PHDR' (6)
4148     Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4149
4150EXPRESSION
4151     An expression giving the numeric type of the program header.  This
4152     may be used for types not defined above.
4153
4154   You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
4155address in memory by using an `AT' expression.  This is identical to the
4156`AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
4157LMA::).  The `AT' command for a program header overrides the output
4158section attribute.
4159
4160   The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4161which comprise the segment.  You may use the `FLAGS' keyword to
4162explicitly specify the segment flags.  The value of FLAGS must be an
4163integer.  It is used to set the `p_flags' field of the program header.
4164
4165   Here is an example of `PHDRS'.  This shows a typical set of program
4166headers used on a native ELF system.
4167
4168     PHDRS
4169     {
4170       headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4171       interp PT_INTERP ;
4172       text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4173       data PT_LOAD ;
4174       dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4175     }
4176
4177     SECTIONS
4178     {
4179       . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4180       .interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
4181       .text : { *(.text) } :text
4182       .rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
4183       ...
4184       . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4185       .data : { *(.data) } :data
4186       .dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
4187       ...
4188     }
4189
4190
4191File: ld.info,  Node: VERSION,  Next: Expressions,  Prev: PHDRS,  Up: Scripts
4192
41933.9 VERSION Command
4194===================
4195
4196The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF.  Symbol versions are
4197only useful when using shared libraries.  The dynamic linker can use
4198symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4199a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4200shared library.
4201
4202   You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
4203or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script.  You
4204can also use the `--version-script' linker option.
4205
4206   The syntax of the `VERSION' command is simply
4207     VERSION { version-script-commands }
4208
4209   The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
4210by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5.  The version script defines a tree of
4211version nodes.  You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4212version script.  You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4213version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4214scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4215library.
4216
4217   The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
4218few examples.
4219
4220     VERS_1.1 {
4221     	 global:
4222     		 foo1;
4223     	 local:
4224     		 old*;
4225     		 original*;
4226     		 new*;
4227     };
4228
4229     VERS_1.2 {
4230     		 foo2;
4231     } VERS_1.1;
4232
4233     VERS_2.0 {
4234     		 bar1; bar2;
4235     	 extern "C++" {
4236     		 ns::*;
4237     		 "f(int, double)";
4238     	 };
4239     } VERS_1.2;
4240
4241   This example version script defines three version nodes.  The first
4242version node defined is `VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies.  The
4243script binds the symbol `foo1' to `VERS_1.1'.  It reduces a number of
4244symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
4245shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4246symbol whose name begins with `old', `original', or `new' is matched.
4247The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell
4248when matching filenames (also known as "globbing").  However, if you
4249specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated
4250as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
4251
4252   Next, the version script defines node `VERS_1.2'.  This node depends
4253upon `VERS_1.1'.  The script binds the symbol `foo2' to the version
4254node `VERS_1.2'.
4255
4256   Finally, the version script defines node `VERS_2.0'.  This node
4257depends upon `VERS_1.2'.  The scripts binds the symbols `bar1' and
4258`bar2' are bound to the version node `VERS_2.0'.
4259
4260   When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4261specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4262unspecified base version of the library.  You can bind all otherwise
4263unspecified symbols to a given version node by using `global: *;'
4264somewhere in the version script.  Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4265wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node.  Global
4266wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4267set exported for an old version.  That's wrong since older versions
4268ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
4269
4270   The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
4271what they might suggest to the person reading them.  The `2.0' version
4272could just as well have appeared in between `1.1' and `1.2'.  However,
4273this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4274
4275   Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in
4276the version script.  Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4277symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
4278which won't.
4279
4280     { global: foo; bar; local: *; };
4281
4282   When you link an application against a shared library that has
4283versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
4284symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
4285each shared library it is linked against.  Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4286loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4287linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4288application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols.  In this
4289way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4290all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4291search for each symbol reference.
4292
4293   The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4294doing minor version checking that SunOS does.  The fundamental problem
4295that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4296functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4297the application starts up.  If a shared library is out of date, a
4298required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4299that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail.  With symbol
4300versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4301the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4302
4303   There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach.  The
4304first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4305source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4306script.  This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4307maintainer.  You can do this by putting something like:
4308     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
4309   in the C source file.  This renames the function `original_foo' to
4310be an alias for `foo' bound to the version node `VERS_1.1'.  The
4311`local:' directive can be used to prevent the symbol `original_foo'
4312from being exported. A `.symver' directive takes precedence over a
4313version script.
4314
4315   The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4316function to appear in a given shared library.  In this way you can make
4317an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4318version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4319linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4320
4321   To do this, you must use multiple `.symver' directives in the source
4322file.  Here is an example:
4323
4324     __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
4325     __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
4326     __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
4327     __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
4328
4329   In this example, `foo@' represents the symbol `foo' bound to the
4330unspecified base version of the symbol.  The source file that contains
4331this example would define 4 C functions: `original_foo', `old_foo',
4332`old_foo1', and `new_foo'.
4333
4334   When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
4335be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4336this symbol will be bound.  You can do this with the `foo@@VERS_2.0'
4337type of `.symver' directive.  You can only declare one version of a
4338symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
4339have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4340
4341   If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4342within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
4343(i.e., `old_foo'), or you can use the `.symver' directive to
4344specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4345
4346   You can also specify the language in the version script:
4347
4348     VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
4349
4350   The supported `lang's are `C', `C++', and `Java'.  The linker will
4351iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
4352according to `lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
4353`version-script-commands'.  The default `lang' is `C'.
4354
4355   Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters.  As
4356described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4357or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly.  In
4358the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4359whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4360cause a mismatch.  As the exact string generated by the demangler might
4361change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
4362check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
4363when you upgrade.
4364
4365
4366File: ld.info,  Node: Expressions,  Next: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: VERSION,  Up: Scripts
4367
43683.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
4369==================================
4370
4371The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4372that of C expressions.  All expressions are evaluated as integers.  All
4373expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4374host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4375
4376   You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4377
4378   The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
4379in expressions.
4380
4381* Menu:
4382
4383* Constants::			Constants
4384* Symbolic Constants::          Symbolic constants
4385* Symbols::			Symbol Names
4386* Orphan Sections::		Orphan Sections
4387* Location Counter::		The Location Counter
4388* Operators::			Operators
4389* Evaluation::			Evaluation
4390* Expression Section::		The Section of an Expression
4391* Builtin Functions::		Builtin Functions
4392
4393
4394File: ld.info,  Node: Constants,  Next: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
4395
43963.10.1 Constants
4397----------------
4398
4399All constants are integers.
4400
4401   As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with `0' to be
4402octal, and an integer beginning with `0x' or `0X' to be hexadecimal.
4403Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of `h' or `H' for
4404hexadeciaml, `o' or `O' for octal, `b' or `B' for binary and `d' or `D'
4405for decimal.  Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is
4406considered to be decimal.
4407
4408   In addition, you can use the suffixes `K' and `M' to scale a
4409constant by `1024' or `1024*1024' respectively.  For example, the
4410following all refer to the same quantity:
4411
4412     _fourk_1 = 4K;
4413     _fourk_2 = 4096;
4414     _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
4415     _fourk_4 = 10000o;
4416
4417   Note - the `K' and `M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
4418the base suffixes mentioned above.
4419
4420
4421File: ld.info,  Node: Symbolic Constants,  Next: Symbols,  Prev: Constants,  Up: Expressions
4422
44233.10.2 Symbolic Constants
4424-------------------------
4425
4426It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of the
4427`CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
4428
4429`MAXPAGESIZE'
4430     The target's maximum page size.
4431
4432`COMMONPAGESIZE'
4433     The target's default page size.
4434
4435   So for example:
4436
4437       .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
4438
4439   will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
4440supported by the target.
4441
4442
4443File: ld.info,  Node: Symbols,  Next: Orphan Sections,  Prev: Symbolic Constants,  Up: Expressions
4444
44453.10.3 Symbol Names
4446-------------------
4447
4448Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4449and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4450Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords.  You can
4451specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4452keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4453     "SECTION" = 9;
4454     "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
4455
4456   Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
4457safest to delimit symbols with spaces.  For example, `A-B' is one
4458symbol, whereas `A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
4459
4460
4461File: ld.info,  Node: Orphan Sections,  Next: Location Counter,  Prev: Symbols,  Up: Expressions
4462
44633.10.4 Orphan Sections
4464----------------------
4465
4466Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
4467explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script.  The
4468linker will still copy these sections into the output file, but it has
4469to guess as to where they should be placed.  The linker uses a simple
4470heuristic to do this.  It attempts to place orphan sections after
4471non-orphan sections of the same attribute, such as code vs data,
4472loadable vs non-loadable, etc.  If there is not enough room to do this
4473then it places at the end of the file.
4474
4475   For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type
4476as well as section flag.
4477
4478   If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
4479the linker will automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols:
4480__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4481section.  These indicate the start address and end address of the
4482orphaned section respectively.  Note: most section names are not
4483representable as C identifiers because they contain a `.' character.
4484
4485
4486File: ld.info,  Node: Location Counter,  Next: Operators,  Prev: Orphan Sections,  Up: Expressions
4487
44883.10.5 The Location Counter
4489---------------------------
4490
4491The special linker variable "dot" `.' always contains the current
4492output location counter.  Since the `.' always refers to a location in
4493an output section, it may only appear in an expression within a
4494`SECTIONS' command.  The `.' symbol may appear anywhere that an
4495ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4496
4497   Assigning a value to `.' will cause the location counter to be
4498moved.  This may be used to create holes in the output section.  The
4499location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4500and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing
4501creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
4502
4503     SECTIONS
4504     {
4505       output :
4506         {
4507           file1(.text)
4508           . = . + 1000;
4509           file2(.text)
4510           . += 1000;
4511           file3(.text)
4512         } = 0x12345678;
4513     }
4514   In the previous example, the `.text' section from `file1' is located
4515at the beginning of the output section `output'.  It is followed by a
45161000 byte gap.  Then the `.text' section from `file2' appears, also
4517with a 1000 byte gap following before the `.text' section from `file3'.
4518The notation `= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps
4519(*note Output Section Fill::).
4520
4521   Note: `.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4522current containing object.  Normally this is the `SECTIONS' statement,
4523whose start address is 0, hence `.' can be used as an absolute address.
4524If `.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
4525byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
4526Thus in a script like this:
4527
4528     SECTIONS
4529     {
4530         . = 0x100
4531         .text: {
4532           *(.text)
4533           . = 0x200
4534         }
4535         . = 0x500
4536         .data: {
4537           *(.data)
4538           . += 0x600
4539         }
4540     }
4541
4542   The `.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
4543a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
4544`.text' input sections to fill this area.  (If there is too much data,
4545an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move `.'
4546backwards).  The `.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have
4547an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from
4548the `.data' input sections and before the end of the `.data' output
4549section itself.
4550
4551   Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4552output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4553needs to place orphan sections.  For example, given the following:
4554
4555     SECTIONS
4556     {
4557         start_of_text = . ;
4558         .text: { *(.text) }
4559         end_of_text = . ;
4560
4561         start_of_data = . ;
4562         .data: { *(.data) }
4563         end_of_data = . ;
4564     }
4565
4566   If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. `.rodata', not
4567mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
4568`.text' and `.data'.  You might think the linker should place `.rodata'
4569on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
4570particular significance to the linker.  As well, the linker doesn't
4571associate the above symbol names with their sections.  Instead, it
4572assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
4573output section, except for the special case of an assignment to `.'.
4574I.e., the linker will place the orphan `.rodata' section as if the
4575script was written as follows:
4576
4577     SECTIONS
4578     {
4579         start_of_text = . ;
4580         .text: { *(.text) }
4581         end_of_text = . ;
4582
4583         start_of_data = . ;
4584         .rodata: { *(.rodata) }
4585         .data: { *(.data) }
4586         end_of_data = . ;
4587     }
4588
4589   This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4590`start_of_data'.  One way to influence the orphan section placement is
4591to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
4592assignment to `.' is setting the start address of a following output
4593section and thus should be grouped with that section.  So you could
4594write:
4595
4596     SECTIONS
4597     {
4598         start_of_text = . ;
4599         .text: { *(.text) }
4600         end_of_text = . ;
4601
4602         . = . ;
4603         start_of_data = . ;
4604         .data: { *(.data) }
4605         end_of_data = . ;
4606     }
4607
4608   Now, the orphan `.rodata' section will be placed between
4609`end_of_text' and `start_of_data'.
4610
4611
4612File: ld.info,  Node: Operators,  Next: Evaluation,  Prev: Location Counter,  Up: Expressions
4613
46143.10.6 Operators
4615----------------
4616
4617The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4618the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4619     precedence      associativity   Operators                Notes
4620     (highest)
4621     1               left            !  -  ~                  (1)
4622     2               left            *  /  %
4623     3               left            +  -
4624     4               left            >>  <<
4625     5               left            ==  !=  >  <  <=  >=
4626     6               left            &
4627     7               left            |
4628     8               left            &&
4629     9               left            ||
4630     10              right           ? :
4631     11              right           &=  +=  -=  *=  /=       (2)
4632     (lowest)
4633   Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
4634
4635
4636File: ld.info,  Node: Evaluation,  Next: Expression Section,  Prev: Operators,  Up: Expressions
4637
46383.10.7 Evaluation
4639-----------------
4640
4641The linker evaluates expressions lazily.  It only computes the value of
4642an expression when absolutely necessary.
4643
4644   The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
4645address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
4646regions, in order to do any linking at all.  These values are computed
4647as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
4648
4649   However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
4650until after storage allocation.  Such values are evaluated later, when
4651other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
4652for use in the symbol assignment expression.
4653
4654   The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
4655assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
4656allocation.
4657
4658   Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
4659`.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
4660
4661   If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
4662available, then an error results.  For example, a script like the
4663following
4664     SECTIONS
4665       {
4666         .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
4667           { *(.text) }
4668       }
4669will cause the error message `non constant expression for initial
4670address'.
4671
4672
4673File: ld.info,  Node: Expression Section,  Next: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Evaluation,  Up: Expressions
4674
46753.10.8 The Section of an Expression
4676-----------------------------------
4677
4678Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute.  A section
4679relative symbol is relocatable.  If you request relocatable output
4680using the `-r' option, a further link operation may change the value of
4681a section relative symbol.  On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
4682retain the same value throughout any further link operations.
4683
4684   Some terms in linker expressions are addresses.  This is true of
4685section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
4686address, such as `ADDR', `LOADADDR', `ORIGIN' and `SEGMENT_START'.
4687Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
4688non-address value, such as `LENGTH'.  One complication is that unless
4689you set `LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")' (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
4690numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
4691location, for compatibility with older versions of `ld'.  Expressions
4692appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
4693absolute addresses.  Expressions appearing inside an output section
4694definition treat absolute symbols as numbers.  If `LD_FEATURE
4695("SANE_EXPR")' is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
4696treated as numbers everywhere.
4697
4698   In the following simple example,
4699
4700     SECTIONS
4701       {
4702         . = 0x100;
4703         __executable_start = 0x100;
4704         .data :
4705         {
4706           . = 0x10;
4707           __data_start = 0x10;
4708           *(.data)
4709         }
4710         ...
4711       }
4712
4713   both `.' and `__executable_start' are set to the absolute address
47140x100 in the first two assignments, then both `.' and `__data_start'
4715are set to 0x10 relative to the `.data' section in the second two
4716assignments.
4717
4718   For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
4719addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
4720
4721   * Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
4722     two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
4723     address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
4724     address(es).
4725
4726   * Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on
4727     one or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in
4728     the same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an
4729     absolute address before applying the operator.
4730
4731   The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
4732
4733   * An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
4734
4735   * The result of comparisons, `&&' and `||' is also a number.
4736
4737   * The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
4738     relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
4739     (after above conversions) is also a number.
4740
4741   * The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
4742     relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
4743     section as the relative operand(s).
4744
4745   * The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
4746     conversions) is an absolute address.
4747
4748   You can use the builtin function `ABSOLUTE' to force an expression
4749to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative.  For example, to
4750create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
4751section `.data':
4752     SECTIONS
4753       {
4754         .data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
4755       }
4756   If `ABSOLUTE' were not used, `_edata' would be relative to the
4757`.data' section.
4758
4759   Using `LOADADDR' also forces an expression absolute, since this
4760particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
4761
4762
4763File: ld.info,  Node: Builtin Functions,  Prev: Expression Section,  Up: Expressions
4764
47653.10.9 Builtin Functions
4766------------------------
4767
4768The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
4769use in linker script expressions.
4770
4771`ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
4772     Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
4773     value of the expression EXP.  Primarily useful to assign an
4774     absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
4775     symbol values are normally section relative.  *Note Expression
4776     Section::.
4777
4778`ADDR(SECTION)'
4779     Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION.  Your script must
4780     previously have defined the location of that section.  In the
4781     following example, `start_of_output_1', `symbol_1' and `symbol_2'
4782     are assigned equivalent values, except that `symbol_1' will be
4783     relative to the `.output1' section while the other two will be
4784     absolute:
4785          SECTIONS { ...
4786            .output1 :
4787              {
4788              start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
4789              ...
4790              }
4791            .output :
4792              {
4793              symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
4794              symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
4795              }
4796          ... }
4797
4798`ALIGN(ALIGN)'
4799`ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
4800     Return the location counter (`.') or arbitrary expression aligned
4801     to the next ALIGN boundary.  The single operand `ALIGN' doesn't
4802     change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
4803     on it.  The two operand `ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
4804     be aligned upwards (`ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to `ALIGN(.,
4805     ALIGN)').
4806
4807     Here is an example which aligns the output `.data' section to the
4808     next `0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
4809     variable within the section to the next `0x8000' boundary after the
4810     input sections:
4811          SECTIONS { ...
4812            .data ALIGN(0x2000): {
4813              *(.data)
4814              variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
4815            }
4816          ... }
4817     The first use of `ALIGN' in this example specifies the
4818     location of a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS
4819     attribute of a section definition (*note Output Section
4820     Address::).  The second use of `ALIGN' is used to defines the
4821     value of a symbol.
4822
4823     The builtin function `NEXT' is closely related to `ALIGN'.
4824
4825`ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
4826     Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that
4827     section has been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated
4828     when this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
4829     following example, the alignment of the `.output' section is
4830     stored as the first value in that section.
4831          SECTIONS{ ...
4832            .output {
4833              LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
4834              ...
4835              }
4836          ... }
4837
4838`BLOCK(EXP)'
4839     This is a synonym for `ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
4840     scripts.  It is most often seen when setting the address of an
4841     output section.
4842
4843`DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
4844     This is equivalent to either
4845          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
4846     or
4847          (ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
4848     depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
4849     pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
4850     expression and `DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not.  If the
4851     latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
4852     memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
4853     bytes in the on-disk file.
4854
4855     This expression can only be used directly in `SECTIONS' commands,
4856     not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
4857     script.  COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
4858     should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized
4859     for (while still working on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE).
4860
4861     Example:
4862            . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
4863
4864`DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
4865     This defines the end of data segment for `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
4866     evaluation purposes.
4867
4868            . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
4869
4870`DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
4871     This defines the end of the `PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when `-z relro'
4872     option is used.  Second argument is returned.  When `-z relro'
4873     option is not present, `DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing,
4874     otherwise `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is
4875     aligned to the most commonly used page boundary for particular
4876     target.  If present in the linker script, it must always come in
4877     between `DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and `DATA_SEGMENT_END'.
4878
4879            . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
4880
4881`DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
4882     Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
4883     defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
4884     return 0.  You can use this function to provide default values for
4885     symbols.  For example, the following script fragment shows how to
4886     set a global symbol `begin' to the first location in the `.text'
4887     section--but if a symbol called `begin' already existed, its value
4888     is preserved:
4889
4890          SECTIONS { ...
4891            .text : {
4892              begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
4893              ...
4894            }
4895            ...
4896          }
4897
4898`LENGTH(MEMORY)'
4899     Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
4900
4901`LOADADDR(SECTION)'
4902     Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION.  (*note Output
4903     Section LMA::).
4904
4905`MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
4906     Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4907
4908`MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
4909     Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
4910
4911`NEXT(EXP)'
4912     Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
4913     This function is closely related to `ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
4914     the `MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
4915     file, the two functions are equivalent.
4916
4917`ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
4918     Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
4919
4920`SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
4921     Return the base address of the named SEGMENT.  If an explicit
4922     value has been given for this segment (with a command-line `-T'
4923     option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
4924     DEFAULT.  At present, the `-T' command-line option can only be
4925     used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
4926     sections, but you can use `SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
4927
4928`SIZEOF(SECTION)'
4929     Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
4930     been allocated.  If the section has not been allocated when this is
4931     evaluated, the linker will report an error.  In the following
4932     example, `symbol_1' and `symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
4933          SECTIONS{ ...
4934            .output {
4935              .start = . ;
4936              ...
4937              .end = . ;
4938              }
4939            symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
4940            symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
4941          ... }
4942
4943`SIZEOF_HEADERS'
4944`sizeof_headers'
4945     Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers.  This is
4946     information which appears at the start of the output file.  You
4947     can use this number when setting the start address of the first
4948     section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
4949
4950     When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
4951     `SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
4952     number of program headers before it has determined all the section
4953     addresses and sizes.  If the linker later discovers that it needs
4954     additional program headers, it will report an error `not enough
4955     room for program headers'.  To avoid this error, you must avoid
4956     using the `SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
4957     script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
4958     headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
4959     `PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
4960
4961
4962File: ld.info,  Node: Implicit Linker Scripts,  Prev: Expressions,  Up: Scripts
4963
49643.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
4965============================
4966
4967If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
4968an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
4969linker script.  If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
4970linker will report an error.
4971
4972   An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
4973
4974   Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
4975assignments, or the `INPUT', `GROUP', or `VERSION' commands.
4976
4977   Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
4978read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
4979script was read.  This can affect archive searching.
4980
4981
4982File: ld.info,  Node: Machine Dependent,  Next: BFD,  Prev: Scripts,  Up: Top
4983
49844 Machine Dependent Features
4985****************************
4986
4987`ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
4988describe them.  Machines where `ld' has no additional functionality are
4989not listed.
4990
4991* Menu:
4992
4993
4994* H8/300::                      `ld' and the H8/300
4995
4996* i960::                        `ld' and the Intel 960 family
4997
4998* ARM::				`ld' and the ARM family
4999
5000* HPPA ELF32::                  `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5001
5002* M68K::			`ld' and the Motorola 68K family
5003
5004* MMIX::			`ld' and MMIX
5005
5006* MSP430::			`ld' and MSP430
5007
5008* M68HC11/68HC12::		`ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5009
5010* PowerPC ELF32::		`ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5011
5012* PowerPC64 ELF64::		`ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5013
5014* SPU ELF::			`ld' and SPU ELF Support
5015
5016* TI COFF::                     `ld' and TI COFF
5017
5018* WIN32::                       `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5019
5020* Xtensa::                      `ld' and Xtensa Processors
5021
5022
5023File: ld.info,  Node: H8/300,  Next: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
5024
50254.1 `ld' and the H8/300
5026=======================
5027
5028For the H8/300, `ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
5029specify the `--relax' command-line option.
5030
5031_relaxing address modes_
5032     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
5033     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
5034     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
5035
5036_synthesizing instructions_
5037     `ld' finds all `mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
5038     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5039     changes them to use the eight-bit address form.  (That is: the
5040     linker turns `mov.b `@'AA:16' into `mov.b `@'AA:8' whenever the
5041     address AA is in the top page of memory).
5042
5043_bit manipulation instructions_
5044     `ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like `band, bclr,
5045     biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
5046     bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
5047     to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
5048     address form.  (That is: the linker turns `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:32'
5049     into `bset #xx:3,`@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
5050     page of memory).
5051
5052_system control instructions_
5053     `ld' finds all `ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
5054     absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
5055     changes them to use 16 bit address form.  (That is: the linker
5056     turns `ldc.w `@'AA:32,ccr' into `ldc.w `@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
5057     address AA is in the top page of memory).
5058
5059
5060File: ld.info,  Node: i960,  Next: ARM,  Prev: H8/300,  Up: Machine Dependent
5061
50624.2 `ld' and the Intel 960 Family
5063=================================
5064
5065You can use the `-AARCHITECTURE' command line option to specify one of
5066the two-letter names identifying members of the 960 family; the option
5067specifies the desired output target, and warns of any incompatible
5068instructions in the input files.  It also modifies the linker's search
5069strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of libraries
5070specific to each particular architecture, by including in the search
5071loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5072
5073   For example, if your `ld' command line included `-ACA' as well as
5074`-ltry', the linker would look (in its built-in search paths, and in
5075any paths you specify with `-L') for a library with the names
5076
5077     try
5078     libtry.a
5079     tryca
5080     libtryca.a
5081
5082The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5083two are due to the use of `-ACA'.
5084
5085   You can meaningfully use `-A' more than once on a command line, since
5086the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures;
5087each use will add another pair of name variants to search for when `-l'
5088specifies a library.
5089
5090   `ld' supports the `--relax' option for the i960 family.  If you
5091specify `--relax', `ld' finds all `balx' and `calx' instructions whose
5092targets are within 24 bits, and turns them into 24-bit program-counter
5093relative `bal' and `cal' instructions, respectively.  `ld' also turns
5094`cal' instructions into `bal' instructions when it determines that the
5095target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5096not itself call any subroutines).
5097
5098   The `--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
5099erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
5100default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile.  It can
5101be enabled otherwise by specifying `--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
5102unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
5103
5104   The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code.  Please contact ARM for
5105further details.
5106
5107   The `--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
5108adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
5109
5110
5111File: ld.info,  Node: M68HC11/68HC12,  Next: PowerPC ELF32,  Prev: MSP430,  Up: Machine Dependent
5112
51134.3 `ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5114====================================================
5115
51164.3.1 Linker Relaxation
5117-----------------------
5118
5119For the Motorola 68HC11, `ld' can perform these global optimizations
5120when you specify the `--relax' command-line option.
5121
5122_relaxing address modes_
5123     `ld' finds all `jsr' and `jmp' instructions whose targets are
5124     within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
5125     relative `bsr' and `bra' instructions, respectively.
5126
5127     `ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5128     transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5129     page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5130
5131_relaxing gcc instruction group_
5132     When `gcc' is called with `-mrelax', it can emit group of
5133     instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5134     addressing mode. These instructions consists of `bclr' or `bset'
5135     instructions.
5136
5137
51384.3.2 Trampoline Generation
5139---------------------------
5140
5141For 68HC11 and 68HC12, `ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
5142function using a normal `jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
5143the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
5144instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
5145pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
5146function trampoline.
5147
5148
5149File: ld.info,  Node: ARM,  Next: HPPA ELF32,  Prev: i960,  Up: Machine Dependent
5150
51514.4 `ld' and the ARM family
5152===========================
5153
5154For the ARM, `ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
5155between ARM and Thumb code.  These stubs only work with code that has
5156been compiled and assembled with the `-mthumb-interwork' command line
5157option.  If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5158libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5159option then the `--support-old-code' command line switch should be
5160given to the linker.  This will make it generate larger stub functions
5161which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code.  Note, however,
5162the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5163non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5164
5165   The `--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic `--entry'
5166switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.  But it also
5167sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
5168a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
5169straight away.
5170
5171   The `--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that
5172the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
5173elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
5174import tables. By default this option is turned off.
5175
5176   The `--be8' switch instructs `ld' to generate BE8 format
5177executables.  This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5178The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5179
5180   The `R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
5181`.init_array' section.  It is interpreted as either `R_ARM_REL32' or
5182`R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target.  The `--target1-rel' and
5183`--target1-abs' switches override the default.
5184
5185   The `--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
5186`R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation.  Valid values for `type', their meanings,
5187and target defaults are as follows:
5188`rel'
5189     `R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5190
5191`abs'
5192     `R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
5193
5194`got-rel'
5195     `R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5196
5197   The `R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
5198enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5199interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
5200but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
5201objects.
5202
5203   In the latter case, the switch `--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
5204linker, which causes v4t `BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as `MOV
5205PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a `BX' instruction.
5206
5207   In the former case, the switch should not be used, and `R_ARM_V4BX'
5208relocations are ignored.
5209
5210   Replace `BX rM' instructions identified by `R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
5211with a branch to the following veneer:
5212
5213     TST rM, #1
5214     MOVEQ PC, rM
5215     BX Rn
5216
5217   This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
5218cores and are still interworking safe.  Note that the above veneer
5219clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in
5220rare cases.
5221
5222   The `--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
5223instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
5224Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
5225BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
5226entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5227
5228   This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
5229to specify it if you are using that target.
5230
5231   The `--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5232bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5233instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
5234code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
5235before the support code can read the intended values.
5236
5237   The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5238intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
5239register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
5240at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
5241only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
5242workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
5243further details.
5244
5245   If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
5246workaround by specifying the linker option `--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
5247you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or `--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
5248if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
5249The default is `--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
5250
5251   If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5252potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5253such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5254first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5255instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5256the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5257are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5258
5259   The `--fix-arm1176' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
5260erratum in certain ARM1176 processors.  The workaround is enabled by
5261default if you are targetting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier.
5262It can be disabled unconditionally by specifying `--no-fix-arm1176'.
5263
5264   Further information is available in the "ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
5265Programmer Advice Notice" available on the ARM documentaion website at:
5266http://infocenter.arm.com/.
5267
5268   The `--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
5269when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
5270size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
5271object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
5272enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
5273diagnosed.
5274
5275   The `--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from
5276warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5277`wchar_t' size attributes.  For example, with this switch enabled,
5278linking of an object file using 32-bit `wchar_t' values with another
5279using 16-bit `wchar_t' values will not be diagnosed.
5280
5281   The `--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5282ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
5283PIC.  This avoids problems on uClinux targets where `--emit-relocs' is
5284used to generate relocatable binaries.
5285
5286   The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5287code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5288perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away.  The
5289placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5290controlled by the command line option `--stub-group-size=N'.  The
5291placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5292duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw.  The linker will try to
5293group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5294code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5295where they should be placed.
5296
5297   The value of `N', the parameter to the `--stub-group-size=' option
5298controls where the stub groups are placed.  If it is negative then all
5299stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them.  If it is
5300positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
5301branches that need them.  If the value of `N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
5302then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
5303using its built in heuristics.  A value of `N' greater than 1 (or
5304smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
5305service at most `N' bytes from the input sections.
5306
5307   The default, if `--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is `N = +1'.
5308
5309   Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5310only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5311otherwise.
5312
5313
5314File: ld.info,  Node: HPPA ELF32,  Next: M68K,  Prev: ARM,  Up: Machine Dependent
5315
53164.5 `ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5317====================================
5318
5319When generating a shared library, `ld' will by default generate import
5320stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.  The
5321`--multi-subspace' switch causes `ld' to generate export stubs, and
5322different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
5323sub-spaces.
5324
5325   Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by `ld' in stub
5326sections located between groups of input sections.  `--stub-group-size'
5327specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
5328stub section.  Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may
5329serve two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section,
5330and one group after it.  However, when using conditional branches that
5331require stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub
5332sections only serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for
5333`N' chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
5334negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1' and
5335`-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input section
5336groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding
5337stub placement as other positive or negative values of `N' respectively.
5338
5339   Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
5340single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5341create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections are too
5342large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5343
5344
5345File: ld.info,  Node: M68K,  Next: MMIX,  Prev: HPPA ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
5346
53474.6 `ld' and the Motorola 68K family
5348====================================
5349
5350The `--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.  The
5351choices are `single', `negative', `multigot' and `target'.  When
5352`target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
5353scheme for the current target.  `single' tells the linker to generate a
5354single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets.  `negative'
5355instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
5356negative and positive offsets.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
5357`multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
5358file.  All GOT references from a single input object file access the
5359same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
5360different GOTs.  Not all environments support such GOTs.
5361
5362
5363File: ld.info,  Node: MMIX,  Next: MSP430,  Prev: M68K,  Up: Machine Dependent
5364
53654.7 `ld' and MMIX
5366=================
5367
5368For MMIX, there is a choice of generating `ELF' object files or `mmo'
5369object files when linking.  The simulator `mmix' understands the `mmo'
5370format.  The binutils `objcopy' utility can translate between the two
5371formats.
5372
5373   There is one special section, the `.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
5374Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5375registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
5376symbols, equal to registers.  In a final link, the start address of the
5377`.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
5378register multiplied by 8.  Register `$255' is not included in this
5379section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
5380`Main' for `mmo' files.
5381
5382   Global symbols with the prefix `__.MMIX.start.', for example
5383`__.MMIX.start..text' and `__.MMIX.start..data' are special.  The
5384default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
5385section.
5386
5387   Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
5388section, are left out from an mmo file.
5389
5390
5391File: ld.info,  Node: MSP430,  Next: M68HC11/68HC12,  Prev: MMIX,  Up: Machine Dependent
5392
53934.8 `ld' and MSP430
5394===================
5395
5396For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture.  The flag
5397`-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
5398MPU type.  (To get a list of known MPUs just pass `-m help' option to
5399the linker).
5400
5401   The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
5402specific:
5403
5404``.vectors''
5405     Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5406
5407``.bootloader''
5408     Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable).  Any
5409     code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5410
5411``.infomem''
5412     Defines an information memory section (if applicable).  Any code in
5413     this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5414
5415``.infomemnobits''
5416     This is the same as the `.infomem' section except that any code in
5417     this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5418
5419``.noinit''
5420     Denotes a portion of RAM located above `.bss' section.
5421
5422     The last two sections are used by gcc.
5423
5424
5425File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC ELF32,  Next: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Prev: M68HC11/68HC12,  Up: Machine Dependent
5426
54274.9 `ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5428=======================================
5429
5430Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5431displacement, which may result in `ld' giving `relocation truncated to
5432fit' errors with very large programs.  `--relax' enables the generation
5433of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space.  These
5434trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
5435be reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size.  You may combine
5436`-r' and `--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link.  In that case
5437both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
5438considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
5439
5440`--bss-plt'
5441     Current PowerPC GCC accepts a `-msecure-plt' option that generates
5442     code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
5443     security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5444     writable and no writable section ever being executable.  PowerPC
5445     `ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
5446     if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5447     compiled with `-msecure-plt'.  `--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
5448     (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5449
5450`--secure-plt'
5451     `ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5452     `-fpic' or `-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
5453     linking non-PIC code.  This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5454     layout.  A warning will be given if some object file requires the
5455     old style BSS PLT.
5456
5457`--sdata-got'
5458     The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5459     sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement.  The
5460     location of `.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an
5461     initialized section while the old PLT is uninitialized.  The
5462     reason for the `.got' change is more subtle:  The new placement
5463     allows `.got' to be read-only in applications linked with `-z
5464     relro -z now'.  However, this placement means that `.sdata' cannot
5465     always be used in shared libraries, because the PowerPC ABI
5466     accesses `.sdata' in shared libraries from the GOT pointer.
5467     `--sdata-got' forces the old GOT placement.  PowerPC GCC doesn't
5468     use `.sdata' in shared libraries, so this option is really only
5469     useful for other compilers that may do so.
5470
5471`--emit-stub-syms'
5472     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
5473     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5474
5475`--no-tls-optimize'
5476     PowerPC `ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
5477     used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to disable
5478     the optimization.
5479
5480
5481File: ld.info,  Node: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Next: SPU ELF,  Prev: PowerPC ELF32,  Up: Machine Dependent
5482
54834.10 `ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5484==========================================
5485
5486`--stub-group-size'
5487     Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs  and TOC adjusting stubs are
5488     placed by `ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
5489     sections.  `--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
5490     group of input sections handled by one stub section.  Since branch
5491     offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
5492     sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
5493     it.  However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
5494     it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
5495     serve one group of input sections.  A negative value for `N'
5496     chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
5497     negative offset.  Two special values of `N' are recognized, `1'
5498     and `-1'.  These both instruct `ld' to automatically size input
5499     section groups for the branch types detected, with the same
5500     behaviour regarding stub placement as other positive or negative
5501     values of `N' respectively.
5502
5503     Note that `--stub-group-size' does not split input sections.  A
5504     single input section larger than the group size specified will of
5505     course create a larger group (of one section).  If input sections
5506     are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
5507     stub.
5508
5509`--emit-stub-syms'
5510     This option causes `ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
5511     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5512
5513`--dotsyms, --no-dotsyms'
5514     These two options control how `ld' interprets version patterns in
5515     a version script.  Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
5516     function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and
5517     a code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (`.').  To
5518     properly version a function `foo', the version script thus needs
5519     to control both `foo' and `.foo'.  The option `--dotsyms', on by
5520     default, automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns.
5521     Use `--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
5522
5523`--no-tls-optimize'
5524     PowerPC64 `ld' normally performs some optimization of code
5525     sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage.  Use this option to
5526     disable the optimization.
5527
5528`--no-opd-optimize'
5529     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes `.opd' section entries
5530     corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
5531     by the action of `--gc-sections' or linker script `/DISCARD/'.
5532     Use this option to disable `.opd' optimization.
5533
5534`--non-overlapping-opd'
5535     Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
5536     `.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
5537     the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
5538     next entry.  This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
5539
5540`--no-toc-optimize'
5541     PowerPC64 `ld' normally removes unused `.toc' section entries.
5542     Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
5543     the TOC in code sections.  A reloc in a deleted code section marks
5544     a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
5545     a TOC word as needed.  Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
5546     relocs are also examined.  TOC words marked as both needed and
5547     unneeded will of course be kept.  TOC words without any referencing
5548     reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
5549     discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word.  This works
5550     reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
5551     assembly code is used to insert TOC entries.  Use this option to
5552     disable the optimization.
5553
5554`--no-multi-toc'
5555     If given any toc option besides `-mcmodel=medium' or
5556     `-mcmodel=large', PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
5557     where TOC entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2.  This
5558     limits the total TOC size to 64K.  PowerPC64 `ld' extends this
5559     limit by grouping code sections such that each group uses less
5560     than 64K for its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs
5561     between inter-group calls.  `ld' does not split apart input
5562     sections, so cannot help if a single input file has a `.toc'
5563     section that exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files
5564     with `ld -r'.  Use this option to turn off this feature.
5565
5566`--no-toc-sort'
5567     By default, `ld' sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
5568     happens to have a section called `.init' or `.fini' are placed
5569     first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated with
5570     PowerPC64 gcc's `-mcmodel=small', and lastly TOC sections
5571     referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
5572     `-mcmodel=medium' or `-mcmodel=large' options.  Doing this results
5573     in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC.  Use this option to turn off
5574     this feature.
5575
5576`--plt-align'
5577`--no-plt-align'
5578     Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
5579     aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
5580     boundary when using `--plt-align='.  By default PLT call stubs are
5581     packed tightly.
5582
5583`--plt-static-chain'
5584`--no-plt-static-chain'
5585     Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
5586     chain pointer (r11).  `ld' defaults to not loading the static
5587     chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
5588
5589`--plt-thread-safe'
5590`--no-thread-safe'
5591     With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when
5592     using lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread
5593     and have another thread see the individual plt entry words update
5594     in the wrong order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct
5595     order and using memory write barriers.  To avoid this we need some
5596     sort of read barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1.  By
5597     default, `ld' looks for calls to commonly used functions that
5598     create threads, and if seen, adds the necessary barriers.  Use
5599     these options to change the default behaviour.
5600
5601
5602File: ld.info,  Node: SPU ELF,  Next: TI COFF,  Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64,  Up: Machine Dependent
5603
56044.11 `ld' and SPU ELF Support
5605=============================
5606
5607`--plugin'
5608     This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
5609
5610`--no-overlays'
5611     Normally, `ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
5612     regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
5613     `ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager.  This option turns
5614     off all this special overlay handling.
5615
5616`--emit-stub-syms'
5617     This option causes `ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
5618     that encodes the stub type and destination.
5619
5620`--extra-overlay-stubs'
5621     This option causes `ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
5622     calls out of overlay regions.  Normally stubs are not added on
5623     calls to non-overlay regions.
5624
5625`--local-store=lo:hi'
5626     `ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
5627     address range 0 to 256k.  This option may be used to change the
5628     range.  Disable the check entirely with `--local-store=0:0'.
5629
5630`--stack-analysis'
5631     SPU local store space is limited.  Over-allocation of stack space
5632     unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
5633     under-allocation results in runtime failures.  If given this
5634     option, `ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
5635     `ld' does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine
5636     the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for
5637     stack adjusting instructions.  A call-graph is created by looking
5638     for relocations on branch instructions.  The graph is then searched
5639     for the maximum stack usage path.  Note that this analysis does not
5640     find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
5641     recursion and other cycles in the call graph.  Stack usage may be
5642     under-estimated if your code makes such calls.  Also, stack usage
5643     for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected.  If a
5644     link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
5645     stack usage and calls will be given.
5646
5647`--emit-stack-syms'
5648     This option, if given along with `--stack-analysis' will result in
5649     `ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.  These take
5650     the form `__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
5651     `__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
5652     `<number>' is the section id in hex.  The value of such symbols is
5653     the stack requirement for the corresponding function.  The symbol
5654     size will be zero, type `STT_NOTYPE', binding `STB_LOCAL', and
5655     section `SHN_ABS'.
5656
5657
5658File: ld.info,  Node: TI COFF,  Next: WIN32,  Prev: SPU ELF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5659
56604.12 `ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
5661================================================
5662
5663The `--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
5664versions.  The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
5665supported.  The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
5666`ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
5667depends on the default specified by the specific target.
5668
5669
5670File: ld.info,  Node: WIN32,  Next: Xtensa,  Prev: TI COFF,  Up: Machine Dependent
5671
56724.13 `ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5673==================================
5674
5675This section describes some of the win32 specific `ld' issues.  See
5676*Note Command Line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
5677command line options mentioned here.
5678
5679_import libraries_
5680     The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
5681     libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's.  They
5682     are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
5683     archive.  The cygwin and mingw ports of `ld' have specific support
5684     for creating such libraries provided with the `--out-implib'
5685     command line option.
5686
5687_exporting DLL symbols_
5688     The cygwin/mingw `ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
5689
5690    _using auto-export functionality_
5691          By default `ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
5692          functionality, which is controlled by the following command
5693          line options:
5694
5695             * -export-all-symbols   [This is the default]
5696
5697             * -exclude-symbols
5698
5699             * -exclude-libs
5700
5701             * -exclude-modules-for-implib
5702
5703             * -version-script
5704
5705          When auto-export is in operation, `ld' will export all the
5706          non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
5707          the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the
5708          system's runtime and libraries.  As it will often not be
5709          desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
5710          private functions that are not part of any public interface,
5711          the command-line options listed above may be used to filter
5712          symbols out from the list for exporting.  The `--output-def'
5713          option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
5714          symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
5715
5716          If `--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
5717          command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
5718          _disabled_ if either of the following are true:
5719
5720             * A DEF file is used.
5721
5722             * Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
5723               __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
5724
5725    _using a DEF file_
5726          Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file.  A DEF
5727          file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
5728          should be exported when a dll is created.  Usually it is
5729          named `<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file
5730          to the linker's command line.  The file's name must end in
5731          `.def' or `.DEF'.
5732
5733               gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
5734
5735          Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
5736          unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
5737
5738          Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
5739          `xyz.dll':
5740
5741               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
5742
5743               EXPORTS
5744               foo
5745               bar
5746               _bar = bar
5747               another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
5748               var1 DATA
5749               doo = foo == foo2
5750               eoo DATA == var1
5751
5752          This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address
5753          and seven symbols in the export table. The third exported
5754          symbol `_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
5755          `another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
5756          and treating it as an alias for `afoo' exported from the DLL
5757          `abc.dll'. The final symbol `var1' is declared to be a data
5758          object. The `doo' symbol in export library is an alias of
5759          `foo', which gets the string name in export table `foo2'. The
5760          `eoo' symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
5761          table the name `var1'.
5762
5763          The optional `LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
5764          name of the output DLL. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
5765          the default library suffix, `.DLL' is appended.
5766
5767          When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
5768          than a library, the `NAME <name>' command should be used
5769          instead of `LIBRARY'. If `<name>' does not include a suffix,
5770          the default executable suffix, `.EXE' is appended.
5771
5772          With either `LIBRARY <name>' or `NAME <name>' the optional
5773          specification `BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
5774          non-default base address for the image.
5775
5776          If neither `LIBRARY <name>' nor  `NAME <name>' is specified,
5777          or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the
5778          same as the filename specified on the command line.
5779
5780          The complete specification of an export symbol is:
5781
5782               EXPORTS
5783                 ( (  ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
5784                    | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
5785                 [ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
5786
5787          Declares `<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
5788          declares `<name1>' as an exported alias for `<name2>'; or
5789          declares `<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
5790          `<external-name>' in the DLL `<module-name>'.  Optionally,
5791          the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
5792          `<integer>' alias. The optional `<name3>' is the to be used
5793          string in import/export table for the symbol.
5794
5795          The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
5796
5797          `NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
5798          table.  It will still be exported by its ordinal alias
5799          (either the value specified by the .def specification or,
5800          otherwise, the value assigned by the linker). The symbol
5801          name, however, does remain visible in the import library (if
5802          any), unless `PRIVATE' is also specified.
5803
5804          `DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
5805          function.  The import lib will export only an indirect
5806          reference to `foo' as the symbol `_imp__foo' (ie, `foo' must
5807          be resolved as `*_imp__foo').
5808
5809          `CONSTANT': Like `DATA', but put the undecorated `foo' as
5810          well as `_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
5811          read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
5812          to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
5813          code fails to add the `dllimport' attribute and also fails to
5814          explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
5815          attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
5816
5817          `PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
5818          not put it into the static import library used to resolve
5819          imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
5820          the `LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by by
5821          using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL
5822          without an import library.
5823
5824          See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
5825          specification of other DEF file statements
5826
5827          While linking a shared dll, `ld' is able to create a DEF file
5828          with the `--output-def <file>' command line option.
5829
5830    _Using decorations_
5831          Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
5832          source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
5833          to be exported is declared as:
5834
5835               __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
5836               __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
5837
5838          All such symbols will be exported from the DLL.  If, however,
5839          any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
5840          in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is
5841          disabled, unless the `--export-all-symbols' option is also
5842          used.
5843
5844          Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
5845          _not_ decorate them with dllexport.  Instead, they should use
5846          dllimport, instead:
5847
5848               __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
5849               __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
5850
5851          This complicates the structure of library header files,
5852          because when included by the library itself the header must
5853          declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
5854          included by client code the header must declare them as
5855          dllimport.  There are a number of idioms that are typically
5856          used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
5857          declaration completely.  See `--enable-auto-import' and
5858          `automatic data imports' for more information.
5859
5860_automatic data imports_
5861     The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
5862     only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which
5863     let the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal
5864     with this issue.  This increases the effort necessary to port
5865     existing Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++
5866     libraries and applications.  The auto-import feature, which was
5867     initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
5868     decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on
5869     POSIX/Un*x platforms. This feature is enabled with the
5870     `--enable-auto-import' command-line option, although it is enabled
5871     by default on cygwin/mingw.  The `--enable-auto-import' option
5872     itself now serves mainly to suppress any warnings that are
5873     ordinarily emitted when linked objects trigger the feature's use.
5874
5875     auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
5876     additional assistance.  Sometimes, you will see this message
5877
5878     "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
5879     documentation for ld's `--enable-auto-import' for details."
5880
5881     The `--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
5882     occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
5883     difficulty.  One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
5884     feature, described below.
5885
5886     For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
5887     classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
5888     variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
5889     particular field or public member, for instance.  Unfortunately,
5890     the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
5891     fixing these references at runtime without the additional
5892     information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.  The
5893     standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
5894     these references.
5895
5896     The `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these
5897     references to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of
5898     adjusting the references themselves (with their non-zero addends)
5899     to specialized code provided by the runtime environment.  Recent
5900     versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers
5901     provide this runtime support; older versions do not.  However, the
5902     support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the
5903     compiled result will run without error on an older system.
5904
5905     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
5906     explicitly enabled as needed.
5907
5908_direct linking to a dll_
5909     The cygwin/mingw ports of `ld' support the direct linking,
5910     including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
5911     libraries.  This is much faster and uses much less memory than
5912     does the traditional import library method, especially when
5913     linking large libraries or applications.  When `ld' creates an
5914     import lib, each function or variable exported from the dll is
5915     stored in its own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many
5916     exports.  The overhead involved in storing, loading, and
5917     processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
5918     tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against
5919     particularly large or complex libraries when using import libs.
5920
5921     Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches
5922     other than `-L' and `-l', because `ld' already searches for a
5923     number of names to match each library.  All that is needed from
5924     the developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
5925     order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
5926
5927     For instance, when ld is called with the argument `-lxxx' it will
5928     attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
5929
5930          libxxx.dll.a
5931          xxx.dll.a
5932          libxxx.a
5933          xxx.lib
5934          cygxxx.dll (*)
5935          libxxx.dll
5936          xxx.dll
5937
5938     before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
5939
5940     (*) Actually, this is not `cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
5941     `<prefix>xxx.dll', where `<prefix>' is set by the `ld' option
5942     `--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
5943     standard gcc spec file includes `--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
5944     effect we actually search for `cygxxx.dll'.
5945
5946     Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may
5947     use other `<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use
5948     of this feature.  It was originally intended to help avoid name
5949     conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
5950     environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
5951     could coexist on the same machine.
5952
5953     The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a `bin' directory for
5954     applications and dll's and a `lib' directory for the import
5955     libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
5956
5957          bin/
5958          	cygxxx.dll
5959          lib/
5960          	libxxx.dll.a   (in case of dll's)
5961          	libxxx.a       (in case of static archive)
5962
5963     Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
5964     done two ways:
5965
5966     1. Use the dll directly by adding the `bin' path to the link line
5967          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
5968
5969     However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
5970     names (`cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
5971     specifies `-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version.  Import
5972     libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
5973
5974     2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the `lib'
5975     directory according to the above mentioned search pattern.  This
5976     should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
5977     making the app/dll.
5978
5979          ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
5980
5981     Then you can link without any make environment changes.
5982
5983          gcc -Wl,-verbose  -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
5984
5985     This technique also avoids the version number problems, because
5986     the following is perfectly legal
5987
5988          bin/
5989          	cygxxx-5.dll
5990          lib/
5991          	libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
5992
5993     Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
5994     even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
5995     `--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
5996
5997     Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
5998     justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all.  There
5999     are three reasons:
6000
6001     1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did _not_
6002     work with auto-imported data.
6003
6004     2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
6005     the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
6006     indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll).  Again,
6007     the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability,
6008     and it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
6009
6010     3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib.  This
6011     is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
6012     API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
6013     of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6014
6015     So, import libs are not going away.  But the ability to replace
6016     true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
6017     dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6018     binutils makes available to the win32 developer.  Given the
6019     massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6020     requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6021     will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
6022
6023_symbol aliasing_
6024
6025    _adding additional names_
6026          Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
6027          names.  A symbol `foo' will be exported as `foo', but it can
6028          also be exported as `_foo' by using special directives in the
6029          DEF file when creating the dll.  This will affect also the
6030          optional created import library.  Consider the following DEF
6031          file:
6032
6033               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6034
6035               EXPORTS
6036               foo
6037               _foo = foo
6038
6039          The line `_foo = foo' maps the symbol `foo' to `_foo'.
6040
6041          Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
6042          the source code using the "weak" attribute:
6043
6044               void foo () { /* Do something.  */; }
6045               void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
6046
6047          See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
6048          weak symbols.
6049
6050    _renaming symbols_
6051          Sometimes it is useful to rename exports.  For instance, the
6052          cygwin kernel does this regularly.  A symbol `_foo' can be
6053          exported as `foo' but not as `_foo' by using special
6054          directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
6055          library, if it is created).  In the following example:
6056
6057               LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6058
6059               EXPORTS
6060               _foo = foo
6061
6062          The line `_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol `foo' to
6063          `_foo'.
6064
6065     Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
6066     unless the `--export-all-symbols' command line option is used.
6067     If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
6068     _all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
6069     are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the `--export-all-symbols'
6070     option.  If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
6071     use `--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
6072     both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed
6073     symbols will be exported.  In effect, you'd be aliasing those
6074     symbols, not renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
6075
6076_weak externals_
6077     The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
6078     called weak externals.  When a weak symbol is linked and the
6079     symbol is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some
6080     other symbol.  There are three variants of weak externals:
6081        * Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
6082          historically called lazy externals.
6083
6084        * Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
6085          libraries.  This form is not presently implemented.
6086
6087        * No search; the symbol is an alias.  This form is not presently
6088          implemented.
6089     As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
6090     symbol are supported.  If the symbol is undefined when linking,
6091     the symbol uses a default value.
6092
6093_aligned common symbols_
6094     As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to
6095     specify the desired alignment for a common symbol.  This
6096     information is conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the
6097     linker by means of GNU-specific commands carried in the object
6098     file's `.drectve' section, which are recognized by `ld' and
6099     respected when laying out the common symbols.  Native tools will
6100     be able to process object files employing this GNU extension, but
6101     will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue
6102     noisy warnings about unknown linker directives.
6103
6104
6105File: ld.info,  Node: Xtensa,  Prev: WIN32,  Up: Machine Dependent
6106
61074.14 `ld' and Xtensa Processors
6108===============================
6109
6110The default `ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6111`SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6112specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6113keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets.  For
6114example, with the command:
6115
6116     SECTIONS
6117     {
6118       .text : {
6119         *(.literal .text)
6120       }
6121     }
6122
6123`ld' may interleave some of the `.literal' and `.text' sections from
6124different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
6125range of PC-relative load offsets.  A valid interleaving might place
6126the `.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
6127`.text' sections of that group of files.  Then, the `.literal' sections
6128from the rest of the files and the `.text' sections from the rest of
6129the files would follow.
6130
6131   Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of `ld' and
6132provides two important link-time optimizations.  The first optimization
6133is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size.  A redundant
6134literal will be removed and all the `L32R' instructions that use it
6135will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6136location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6137the `L32R' instructions.  The second optimization is to remove
6138unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of
6139`L32R'/`CALLXN' when the target functions are within range of direct
6140`CALLN' instructions.
6141
6142   For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
6143optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the `CALLXN'
6144instruction to a `CALLN' instruction, remove the `L32R' instruction,
6145and remove the literal referenced by the `L32R' instruction if it is
6146not used for anything else.  Removing the `L32R' instruction always
6147reduces code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the
6148alignment of subsequent branch targets.  By default, the linker will
6149always preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions
6150between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by
6151inserting a no-op in place of the `L32R' instruction that was removed.
6152If code size is more important than performance, the `--size-opt'
6153option can be used to prevent the linker from widening density
6154instructions or inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops
6155are required for correctness.
6156
6157   The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6158control the linker:
6159
6160`--size-opt'
6161     When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
6162     size more than performance.  With this option, the linker will not
6163     insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
6164     target alignment.  There may still be some cases where no-ops are
6165     required to preserve the correctness of the code.
6166
6167
6168File: ld.info,  Node: BFD,  Next: Reporting Bugs,  Prev: Machine Dependent,  Up: Top
6169
61705 BFD
6171*****
6172
6173The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6174These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6175object files whatever the object file format.  A different object file
6176format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6177it to the library.  To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6178associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6179object file formats available.  You can use `objdump -i' (*note
6180objdump: (binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for
6181your configuration.
6182
6183   As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
6184conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
6185efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which
6186would not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly
6187offset by abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and
6188back ends, more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a
6189greater speed.
6190
6191   One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
6192is the potential for information loss.  There are two places where
6193useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6194conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
6195
6196* Menu:
6197
6198* BFD outline::                 How it works: an outline of BFD
6199
6200
6201File: ld.info,  Node: BFD outline,  Up: BFD
6202
62035.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
6204===================================
6205
6206When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
6207the format of the input object file.  They then build a descriptor in
6208memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
6209the object file's data structures.
6210
6211   As different information from the object files is required, BFD
6212reads from different sections of the file and processes them.  For
6213example, a very common operation for the linker is processing symbol
6214tables.  Each BFD back end provides a routine for converting between
6215the object file's representation of symbols and an internal canonical
6216format. When the linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it
6217calls through a memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD
6218back end which reads and converts the table into a canonical form.  The
6219linker then operates upon the canonical form. When the link is finished
6220and the linker writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back
6221end routine is called to take the newly created symbol table and
6222convert it into the chosen output format.
6223
6224* Menu:
6225
6226* BFD information loss::	Information Loss
6227* Canonical format::		The BFD	canonical object-file format
6228
6229
6230File: ld.info,  Node: BFD information loss,  Next: Canonical format,  Up: BFD outline
6231
62325.1.1 Information Loss
6233----------------------
6234
6235_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
6236by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can
6237be described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One
6238example of this is alignment information in `b.out'. There is nowhere
6239in an `a.out' format file to store alignment information on the
6240contained data, so when a file is linked from `b.out' and an `a.out'
6241image is produced, alignment information will not propagate to the
6242output file. (The linker will still use the alignment information
6243internally, so the link is performed correctly).
6244
6245   Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
6246unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
6247the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
6248(e.g., `a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
6249the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
6250describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
6251command language.
6252
6253   _Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
6254canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
6255structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
6256internally.  This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
6257possible data richness through the transformation between external to
6258internal and back to external formats.
6259
6260   This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
6261format and writes another.  Each BFD back end is responsible for
6262maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
6263form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
6264to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
6265is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
6266end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
6267is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
6268able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
6269information it prepared earlier.  Since there is a great deal of
6270commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when
6271linking or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or `a.out' to
6272`b.out'.  When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only
6273lost from the files whose format differs from the destination.
6274
6275
6276File: ld.info,  Node: Canonical format,  Prev: BFD information loss,  Up: BFD outline
6277
62785.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
6279------------------------------------------
6280
6281The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
6282least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
6283that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
6284format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
6285understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
6286conversions.
6287
6288_files_
6289     Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
6290     architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
6291     pageable bit, and a write protected bit.  Information like Unix
6292     magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
6293     so a `ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
6294     write protected text bit set.  The byte order of the target is
6295     stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
6296     files may be used with one another.
6297
6298_sections_
6299     Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
6300     the section's original address in the object file, size and
6301     alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
6302     data structures.
6303
6304_symbols_
6305     Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
6306     file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
6307     flag bits.  When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
6308     relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
6309     section where they were defined.  Doing this ensures that each
6310     symbol points to its containing section.  Each symbol also has a
6311     varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end.  Since
6312     the symbol points to the original file, the private data format
6313     for that symbol is accessible.  `ld' can operate on a collection
6314     of symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
6315
6316     Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output,
6317     so an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols
6318     pointing to functions and to global, static, and common variables.
6319     Some symbol information is not worth retaining; in `a.out', type
6320     information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
6321     This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
6322     linker has command line switches to allow users to throw it away.
6323
6324     There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
6325     format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
6326     example, COFF, IEEE, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit
6327     within one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the
6328     information will be preserved.
6329
6330_relocation level_
6331     Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
6332     symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
6333     section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
6334     descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
6335     the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
6336     relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
6337     method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
6338     instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format.  A relocation
6339     record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
6340     routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
6341     byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
6342     such relocation type.
6343
6344_line numbers_
6345     Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
6346     mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
6347     output file.  These addresses have to be relocated along with the
6348     symbol information.  Each symbol with an associated list of line
6349     number records points to the first record of the list.  The head
6350     of a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
6351     allows finding out the address of the function whose line number
6352     is being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs:
6353     offsets into the section and line numbers. Any format which can
6354     simply derive this information can pass it successfully between
6355     formats (COFF, IEEE and Oasys).
6356
6357
6358File: ld.info,  Node: Reporting Bugs,  Next: MRI,  Prev: BFD,  Up: Top
6359
63606 Reporting Bugs
6361****************
6362
6363Your bug reports play an essential role in making `ld' reliable.
6364
6365   Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
6366or it may not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report
6367is to help the entire community by making the next version of `ld' work
6368better.  Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of `ld'.
6369
6370   In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6371information that enables us to fix the bug.
6372
6373* Menu:
6374
6375* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
6376* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
6377
6378
6379File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Criteria,  Next: Bug Reporting,  Up: Reporting Bugs
6380
63816.1 Have You Found a Bug?
6382=========================
6383
6384If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
6385guidelines:
6386
6387   * If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
6388     a `ld' bug.  Reliable linkers never crash.
6389
6390   * If `ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
6391
6392   * If `ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
6393     may be a bug.  In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6394     object files are correct.
6395
6396   * If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
6397     improvement of `ld' are welcome in any case.
6398
6399
6400File: ld.info,  Node: Bug Reporting,  Prev: Bug Criteria,  Up: Reporting Bugs
6401
64026.2 How to Report Bugs
6403======================
6404
6405A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
6406If you obtained `ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
6407contact that organization first.
6408
6409   You can find contact information for many support companies and
6410individuals in the file `etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
6411
6412   Otherwise, send bug reports for `ld' to
6413`http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/'.
6414
6415   The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6416*report all the facts*.  If you are not sure whether to state a fact or
6417leave it out, state it!
6418
6419   Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6420problem and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might
6421assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
6422Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug
6423is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location
6424where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were
6425different, the contents of that location would fool the linker into
6426doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and give a
6427specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
6428and the most helpful.
6429
6430   Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6431the bug if it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports
6432on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
6433
6434   Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
6435bell?"  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
6436respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.  You
6437might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
6438
6439   To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6440
6441   * The version of `ld'.  `ld' announces it if you start it with the
6442     `--version' argument.
6443
6444     Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
6445     looking for the bug in the current version of `ld'.
6446
6447   * Any patches you may have applied to the `ld' source, including any
6448     patches made to the `BFD' library.
6449
6450   * The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
6451     and version number.
6452
6453   * What compiler (and its version) was used to compile `ld'--e.g.
6454     "`gcc-2.7'".
6455
6456   * The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6457     observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something
6458     important, list them all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output
6459     from make) is sufficient.
6460
6461     If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
6462     wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
6463
6464   * A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
6465     the bug.  It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
6466     files provided that they are reasonably small.  Say no more than
6467     10K.  For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP
6468     or HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object
6469     file(s) to whomever requests them.  (Note - your email will be
6470     going to a mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with
6471     large attachments).  But small attachments are best.
6472
6473     If the source files were assembled using `gas' or compiled using
6474     `gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6475     object files.  In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6476     `gas' or `gcc' was used to produce the object files.  Also say how
6477     `gas' or `gcc' were configured.
6478
6479   * A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6480     incorrect.  For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
6481
6482     Of course, if the bug is that `ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
6483     will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we
6484     might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well
6485     not give us a chance to make a mistake.
6486
6487     Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
6488     still say so explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on,
6489     such as, your copy of `ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
6490     a bug in the C library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your
6491     copy might crash and ours would not.  If you told us to expect a
6492     crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
6493     was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to expect a
6494     crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
6495     observations.
6496
6497   * If you wish to suggest changes to the `ld' source, send us context
6498     diffs, as generated by `diff' with the `-u', `-c', or `-p' option.
6499     Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
6500     discuss something in the `ld' source, refer to it by context, not
6501     by line number.
6502
6503     The line numbers in our development sources will not match those
6504     in your sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful
6505     information to us.
6506
6507   Here are some things that are not necessary:
6508
6509   * A description of the envelope of the bug.
6510
6511     Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6512     which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6513     changes will not affect it.
6514
6515     This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
6516     we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
6517     debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
6518     examples.  We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6519
6520     Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_
6521     of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
6522     output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6523     less time, and so on.
6524
6525     However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
6526     this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
6527     used.
6528
6529   * A patch for the bug.
6530
6531     A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not
6532     omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
6533     assumption that a patch is all we need.  We might see problems
6534     with your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we
6535     might not understand it at all.
6536
6537     Sometimes with a program as complicated as `ld' it is very hard to
6538     construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
6539     path through the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will
6540     not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify
6541     that the bug is fixed.
6542
6543     And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
6544     your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A
6545     test case will help us to understand.
6546
6547   * A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6548
6549     Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about
6550     such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6551
6552
6553File: ld.info,  Node: MRI,  Next: GNU Free Documentation License,  Prev: Reporting Bugs,  Up: Top
6554
6555Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
6556**************************************
6557
6558To aid users making the transition to GNU `ld' from the MRI linker,
6559`ld' can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the
6560more general-purpose linker scripting language described in *Note
6561Scripts::.  MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command
6562set than the scripting language otherwise used with `ld'.  GNU `ld'
6563supports the most commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are
6564described here.
6565
6566   In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the `a.out' object
6567file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
6568features to make use of them.
6569
6570   You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
6571`-c' command-line option.
6572
6573   Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
6574command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
6575blank lines are also allowed for punctuation).  If a line of an
6576MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, `ld' issues
6577a warning message, but continues processing the script.
6578
6579   Lines beginning with `*' are comments.
6580
6581   You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
6582lower case; for example, `chip' is the same as `CHIP'.  The following
6583list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
6584
6585`ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
6586`ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
6587     Normally, `ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
6588     the input files.  However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can
6589     use the `ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
6590     present in your output program.  If the `ABSOLUTE' command is used
6591     at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
6592     `ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output.  You can
6593     still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
6594     line, or using `LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
6595
6596`ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
6597     Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME
6598     in a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
6599
6600     IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
6601
6602`ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
6603     Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION.  The EXPRESSION
6604     should be a power of two.
6605
6606`BASE EXPRESSION'
6607     Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
6608     absolute addresses) in the output file.
6609
6610`CHIP EXPRESSION'
6611`CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
6612     This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
6613
6614`END'
6615     This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
6616     compatibility.
6617
6618`FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
6619     Similar to the `OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
6620     language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
6621
6622       1. S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `S'
6623
6624       2. IEEE, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is `IEEE'
6625
6626       3. COFF (the `coff-m68k' variant in BFD), if OUTPUT-FORMAT is
6627          `COFF'
6628
6629`LIST ANYTHING...'
6630     Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
6631     `ld' command-line option `-M'.
6632
6633     The keyword `LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
6634     with no change in its effect.
6635
6636`LOAD FILENAME'
6637`LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
6638     Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
6639     same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the `ld' command
6640     line.
6641
6642`NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
6643     OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by `ld'; the
6644     MRI-compatible command `NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
6645     option `-o' or the general script language command `OUTPUT'.
6646
6647`ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
6648`ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
6649     Normally, `ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
6650     in which they first appear in the input files.  In an
6651     MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
6652     `ORDER' command.  The sections you list with `ORDER' will appear
6653     first in your output file, in the order specified.
6654
6655`PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
6656`PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
6657`PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
6658     Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
6659     linker input files.
6660
6661`SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
6662`SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
6663`SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
6664     You can use any of these three forms of the `SECT' command to
6665     specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME.  If
6666     you have more than one `SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only
6667     the _first_ sets the start address.
6668
6669
6670File: ld.info,  Node: GNU Free Documentation License,  Next: LD Index,  Prev: MRI,  Up: Top
6671
6672Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
6673*****************************************
6674
6675                     Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
6676
6677     Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
6678     `http://fsf.org/'
6679
6680     Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
6681     of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
6682
6683  0. PREAMBLE
6684
6685     The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
6686     functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
6687     assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
6688     with or without modifying it, either commercially or
6689     noncommercially.  Secondarily, this License preserves for the
6690     author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
6691     being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
6692
6693     This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
6694     works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
6695     It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
6696     license designed for free software.
6697
6698     We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
6699     free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
6700     free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
6701     that the software does.  But this License is not limited to
6702     software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
6703     of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book.
6704     We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
6705     instruction or reference.
6706
6707  1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
6708
6709     This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
6710     that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it
6711     can be distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice
6712     grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
6713     to use that work under the conditions stated herein.  The
6714     "Document", below, refers to any such manual or work.  Any member
6715     of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you".  You
6716     accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a
6717     way requiring permission under copyright law.
6718
6719     A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
6720     Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
6721     modifications and/or translated into another language.
6722
6723     A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
6724     of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
6725     publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
6726     subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
6727     fall directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document
6728     is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
6729     explain any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of
6730     historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
6731     of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
6732     regarding them.
6733
6734     The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
6735     titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in
6736     the notice that says that the Document is released under this
6737     License.  If a section does not fit the above definition of
6738     Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant.
6739     The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections.  If the Document
6740     does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
6741
6742     The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
6743     listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
6744     that says that the Document is released under this License.  A
6745     Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
6746     be at most 25 words.
6747
6748     A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
6749     represented in a format whose specification is available to the
6750     general public, that is suitable for revising the document
6751     straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images
6752     composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some
6753     widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to
6754     text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of
6755     formats suitable for input to text formatters.  A copy made in an
6756     otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of
6757     markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent
6758     modification by readers is not Transparent.  An image format is
6759     not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text.  A
6760     copy that is not "Transparent" is called "Opaque".
6761
6762     Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
6763     ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
6764     SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and
6765     standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for
6766     human modification.  Examples of transparent image formats include
6767     PNG, XCF and JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that
6768     can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
6769     XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally
6770     available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF
6771     produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
6772
6773     The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
6774     plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
6775     material this License requires to appear in the title page.  For
6776     works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
6777     Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
6778     work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
6779
6780     The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
6781     of the Document to the public.
6782
6783     A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
6784     whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
6785     following text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ
6786     stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
6787     "Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
6788     To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
6789     Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
6790     to this definition.
6791
6792     The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
6793     which states that this License applies to the Document.  These
6794     Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
6795     this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
6796     implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
6797     has no effect on the meaning of this License.
6798
6799  2. VERBATIM COPYING
6800
6801     You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
6802     commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
6803     copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
6804     applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
6805     add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You
6806     may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
6807     or further copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However,
6808     you may accept compensation in exchange for copies.  If you
6809     distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow
6810     the conditions in section 3.
6811
6812     You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
6813     and you may publicly display copies.
6814
6815  3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
6816
6817     If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
6818     have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
6819     the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
6820     enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
6821     these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
6822     Back-Cover Texts on the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly
6823     and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies.  The
6824     front cover must present the full title with all words of the
6825     title equally prominent and visible.  You may add other material
6826     on the covers in addition.  Copying with changes limited to the
6827     covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
6828     satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in
6829     other respects.
6830
6831     If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
6832     legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
6833     reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
6834     adjacent pages.
6835
6836     If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
6837     numbering more than 100, you must either include a
6838     machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or
6839     state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from
6840     which the general network-using public has access to download
6841     using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent
6842     copy of the Document, free of added material.  If you use the
6843     latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you
6844     begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that
6845     this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
6846     location until at least one year after the last time you
6847     distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or
6848     retailers) of that edition to the public.
6849
6850     It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
6851     the Document well before redistributing any large number of
6852     copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated
6853     version of the Document.
6854
6855  4. MODIFICATIONS
6856
6857     You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
6858     under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
6859     release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with
6860     the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus
6861     licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to
6862     whoever possesses a copy of it.  In addition, you must do these
6863     things in the Modified Version:
6864
6865       A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
6866          distinct from that of the Document, and from those of
6867          previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed
6868          in the History section of the Document).  You may use the
6869          same title as a previous version if the original publisher of
6870          that version gives permission.
6871
6872       B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
6873          entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
6874          the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
6875          principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
6876          authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
6877          from this requirement.
6878
6879       C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
6880          Modified Version, as the publisher.
6881
6882       D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
6883
6884       E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
6885          adjacent to the other copyright notices.
6886
6887       F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
6888          notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
6889          Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
6890          the Addendum below.
6891
6892       G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
6893          Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
6894          license notice.
6895
6896       H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
6897
6898       I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
6899          and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
6900          authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on
6901          the Title Page.  If there is no section Entitled "History" in
6902          the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors,
6903          and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page,
6904          then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in
6905          the previous sentence.
6906
6907       J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
6908          for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
6909          likewise the network locations given in the Document for
6910          previous versions it was based on.  These may be placed in
6911          the "History" section.  You may omit a network location for a
6912          work that was published at least four years before the
6913          Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version
6914          it refers to gives permission.
6915
6916       K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
6917          Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the
6918          section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
6919          acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
6920
6921       L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
6922          unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
6923          or the equivalent are not considered part of the section
6924          titles.
6925
6926       M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements".  Such a section
6927          may not be included in the Modified Version.
6928
6929       N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
6930          "Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
6931          Section.
6932
6933       O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
6934
6935     If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
6936     appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
6937     material copied from the Document, you may at your option
6938     designate some or all of these sections as invariant.  To do this,
6939     add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified
6940     Version's license notice.  These titles must be distinct from any
6941     other section titles.
6942
6943     You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
6944     nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
6945     parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
6946     has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
6947     definition of a standard.
6948
6949     You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
6950     and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
6951     of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one
6952     passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be
6953     added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the
6954     Document already includes a cover text for the same cover,
6955     previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity
6956     you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may
6957     replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous
6958     publisher that added the old one.
6959
6960     The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
6961     License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
6962     assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
6963
6964  5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
6965
6966     You may combine the Document with other documents released under
6967     this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
6968     modified versions, provided that you include in the combination
6969     all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
6970     unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
6971     combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
6972     their Warranty Disclaimers.
6973
6974     The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
6975     multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
6976     copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
6977     but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
6978     by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
6979     original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
6980     unique number.  Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
6981     the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
6982     combined work.
6983
6984     In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
6985     "History" in the various original documents, forming one section
6986     Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
6987     "Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications".  You
6988     must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
6989
6990  6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
6991
6992     You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
6993     documents released under this License, and replace the individual
6994     copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
6995     that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
6996     rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the
6997     documents in all other respects.
6998
6999     You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
7000     distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
7001     a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow
7002     this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of
7003     that document.
7004
7005  7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
7006
7007     A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
7008     separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of
7009     a storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
7010     copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
7011     legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
7012     works permit.  When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
7013     License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
7014     are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
7015
7016     If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
7017     copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
7018     of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
7019     on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
7020     electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
7021     form.  Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
7022     the whole aggregate.
7023
7024  8. TRANSLATION
7025
7026     Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
7027     distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
7028     4.  Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
7029     permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
7030     translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
7031     original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
7032     translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
7033     Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
7034     include the original English version of this License and the
7035     original versions of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a
7036     disagreement between the translation and the original version of
7037     this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
7038     prevail.
7039
7040     If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
7041     "Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
7042     Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
7043     actual title.
7044
7045  9. TERMINATION
7046
7047     You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
7048     except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
7049     otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
7050     and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
7051
7052     However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
7053     license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
7054     provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly
7055     and finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
7056     copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
7057     reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
7058
7059     Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
7060     reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
7061     violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
7062     received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
7063     that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
7064     after your receipt of the notice.
7065
7066     Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
7067     the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from
7068     you under this License.  If your rights have been terminated and
7069     not permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of
7070     the same material does not give you any rights to use it.
7071
7072 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
7073
7074     The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
7075     the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
7076     versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
7077     differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
7078     `http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/'.
7079
7080     Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
7081     number.  If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
7082     version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
7083     have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
7084     that specified version or of any later version that has been
7085     published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If
7086     the Document does not specify a version number of this License,
7087     you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the
7088     Free Software Foundation.  If the Document specifies that a proxy
7089     can decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
7090     proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
7091     authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
7092
7093 11. RELICENSING
7094
7095     "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
7096     World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
7097     provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
7098     public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
7099     A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
7100     site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
7101     site.
7102
7103     "CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
7104     license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
7105     corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
7106     California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
7107     published by that same organization.
7108
7109     "Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
7110     in part, as part of another Document.
7111
7112     An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
7113     License, and if all works that were first published under this
7114     License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
7115     incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
7116     texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
7117     to November 1, 2008.
7118
7119     The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
7120     site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
7121     2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
7122
7123
7124ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
7125====================================================
7126
7127To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
7128the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
7129notices just after the title page:
7130
7131       Copyright (C)  YEAR  YOUR NAME.
7132       Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
7133       under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
7134       or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
7135       with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
7136       Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
7137       Free Documentation License''.
7138
7139   If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
7140Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
7141
7142         with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
7143         the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
7144         being LIST.
7145
7146   If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
7147combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
7148situation.
7149
7150   If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
7151recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
7152free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to
7153permit their use in free software.
7154
7155
7156File: ld.info,  Node: LD Index,  Prev: GNU Free Documentation License,  Up: Top
7157
7158LD Index
7159********
7160
7161�[index�]
7162* Menu:
7163
7164* ":                                     Symbols.            (line    6)
7165* -(:                                    Options.            (line  696)
7166* --accept-unknown-input-arch:           Options.            (line  714)
7167* --add-needed:                          Options.            (line  738)
7168* --add-stdcall-alias:                   Options.            (line 1589)
7169* --allow-multiple-definition:           Options.            (line  989)
7170* --allow-shlib-undefined:               Options.            (line  995)
7171* --architecture=ARCH:                   Options.            (line  123)
7172* --as-needed:                           Options.            (line  724)
7173* --audit AUDITLIB:                      Options.            (line  112)
7174* --auxiliary=NAME:                      Options.            (line  255)
7175* --bank-window:                         Options.            (line 2021)
7176* --base-file:                           Options.            (line 1594)
7177* --be8:                                 ARM.                (line   28)
7178* --bss-plt:                             PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7179* --build-id:                            Options.            (line 1551)
7180* --build-id=STYLE:                      Options.            (line 1551)
7181* --check-sections:                      Options.            (line  817)
7182* --copy-dt-needed-entries:              Options.            (line  829)
7183* --cref:                                Options.            (line  849)
7184* --default-imported-symver:             Options.            (line 1032)
7185* --default-script=SCRIPT:               Options.            (line  541)
7186* --default-symver:                      Options.            (line 1028)
7187* --defsym=SYMBOL=EXP:                   Options.            (line  877)
7188* --demangle[=STYLE]:                    Options.            (line  890)
7189* --depaudit AUDITLIB:                   Options.            (line  177)
7190* --disable-auto-image-base:             Options.            (line 1773)
7191* --disable-auto-import:                 Options.            (line 1908)
7192* --disable-long-section-names:          Options.            (line 1604)
7193* --disable-new-dtags:                   Options.            (line 1514)
7194* --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:        Options.            (line 1921)
7195* --disable-stdcall-fixup:               Options.            (line 1626)
7196* --discard-all:                         Options.            (line  587)
7197* --discard-locals:                      Options.            (line  591)
7198* --dll:                                 Options.            (line 1599)
7199* --dll-search-prefix:                   Options.            (line 1779)
7200* --dotsyms:                             PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7201* --dsbt-index:                          Options.            (line 1998)
7202* --dsbt-size:                           Options.            (line 1993)
7203* --dynamic-linker=FILE:                 Options.            (line  903)
7204* --dynamic-list-cpp-new:                Options.            (line  809)
7205* --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo:           Options.            (line  813)
7206* --dynamic-list-data:                   Options.            (line  806)
7207* --dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE:      Options.            (line  793)
7208* --dynamicbase:                         Options.            (line 1957)
7209* --eh-frame-hdr:                        Options.            (line 1505)
7210* --emit-relocs:                         Options.            (line  476)
7211* --emit-stack-syms:                     SPU ELF.            (line   46)
7212* --emit-stub-syms <1>:                  SPU ELF.            (line   15)
7213* --emit-stub-syms <2>:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
7214* --emit-stub-syms:                      PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
7215* --enable-auto-image-base:              Options.            (line 1765)
7216* --enable-auto-import:                  Options.            (line 1788)
7217* --enable-extra-pe-debug:               Options.            (line 1926)
7218* --enable-long-section-names:           Options.            (line 1604)
7219* --enable-new-dtags:                    Options.            (line 1514)
7220* --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc:         Options.            (line 1913)
7221* --enable-stdcall-fixup:                Options.            (line 1626)
7222* --entry=ENTRY:                         Options.            (line  187)
7223* --error-unresolved-symbols:            Options.            (line 1458)
7224* --exclude-all-symbols:                 Options.            (line 1680)
7225* --exclude-libs:                        Options.            (line  197)
7226* --exclude-modules-for-implib:          Options.            (line  208)
7227* --exclude-symbols:                     Options.            (line 1674)
7228* --export-all-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1650)
7229* --export-dynamic:                      Options.            (line  221)
7230* --extra-overlay-stubs:                 SPU ELF.            (line   19)
7231* --fatal-warnings:                      Options.            (line  910)
7232* --file-alignment:                      Options.            (line 1684)
7233* --filter=NAME:                         Options.            (line  276)
7234* --fix-arm1176:                         ARM.                (line  111)
7235* --fix-cortex-a8:                       i960.               (line   39)
7236* --fix-v4bx:                            ARM.                (line   49)
7237* --fix-v4bx-interworking:               ARM.                (line   62)
7238* --force-dynamic:                       Options.            (line  485)
7239* --force-exe-suffix:                    Options.            (line  915)
7240* --forceinteg:                          Options.            (line 1962)
7241* --format=FORMAT:                       Options.            (line  134)
7242* --format=VERSION:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
7243* --gc-sections:                         Options.            (line  925)
7244* --got:                                 Options.            (line 2034)
7245* --got=TYPE:                            M68K.               (line    6)
7246* --gpsize=VALUE:                        Options.            (line  309)
7247* --hash-size=NUMBER:                    Options.            (line 1523)
7248* --hash-style=STYLE:                    Options.            (line 1531)
7249* --heap:                                Options.            (line 1690)
7250* --help:                                Options.            (line  962)
7251* --image-base:                          Options.            (line 1697)
7252* --just-symbols=FILE:                   Options.            (line  508)
7253* --kill-at:                             Options.            (line 1706)
7254* --large-address-aware:                 Options.            (line 1711)
7255* --ld-generated-unwind-info:            Options.            (line 1509)
7256* --leading-underscore:                  Options.            (line 1644)
7257* --library-path=DIR:                    Options.            (line  368)
7258* --library=NAMESPEC:                    Options.            (line  335)
7259* --local-store=lo:hi:                   SPU ELF.            (line   24)
7260* --major-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1720)
7261* --major-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1725)
7262* --major-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1729)
7263* --merge-exidx-entries:                 i960.               (line   48)
7264* --minor-image-version:                 Options.            (line 1734)
7265* --minor-os-version:                    Options.            (line 1739)
7266* --minor-subsystem-version:             Options.            (line 1743)
7267* --mri-script=MRI-CMDFILE:              Options.            (line  158)
7268* --multi-subspace:                      HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
7269* --nmagic:                              Options.            (line  439)
7270* --no-accept-unknown-input-arch:        Options.            (line  714)
7271* --no-add-needed:                       Options.            (line  738)
7272* --no-allow-shlib-undefined:            Options.            (line  995)
7273* --no-as-needed:                        Options.            (line  724)
7274* --no-bind:                             Options.            (line 1976)
7275* --no-check-sections:                   Options.            (line  817)
7276* --no-copy-dt-needed-entries:           Options.            (line  829)
7277* --no-define-common:                    Options.            (line  861)
7278* --no-demangle:                         Options.            (line  890)
7279* --no-dotsyms:                          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7280* --no-enum-size-warning:                ARM.                (line  120)
7281* --no-export-dynamic:                   Options.            (line  221)
7282* --no-fatal-warnings:                   Options.            (line  910)
7283* --no-fix-arm1176:                      ARM.                (line  111)
7284* --no-fix-cortex-a8:                    i960.               (line   39)
7285* --no-gc-sections:                      Options.            (line  925)
7286* --no-isolation:                        Options.            (line 1969)
7287* --no-keep-memory:                      Options.            (line  974)
7288* --no-leading-underscore:               Options.            (line 1644)
7289* --no-merge-exidx-entries <1>:          Options.            (line 2005)
7290* --no-merge-exidx-entries:              i960.               (line   48)
7291* --no-multi-toc:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
7292* --no-omagic:                           Options.            (line  454)
7293* --no-opd-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
7294* --no-overlays:                         SPU ELF.            (line    9)
7295* --no-plt-align:                        PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   96)
7296* --no-plt-static-chain:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  103)
7297* --no-plt-thread-safe:                  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  109)
7298* --no-print-gc-sections:                Options.            (line  947)
7299* --no-seh:                              Options.            (line 1972)
7300* --no-tls-optimize <1>:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
7301* --no-tls-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
7302* --no-toc-optimize:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
7303* --no-toc-sort:                         PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   86)
7304* --no-trampoline:                       Options.            (line 2015)
7305* --no-undefined:                        Options.            (line  981)
7306* --no-undefined-version:                Options.            (line 1023)
7307* --no-warn-mismatch:                    Options.            (line 1036)
7308* --no-warn-search-mismatch:             Options.            (line 1045)
7309* --no-wchar-size-warning:               ARM.                (line  127)
7310* --no-whole-archive:                    Options.            (line 1049)
7311* --noinhibit-exec:                      Options.            (line 1053)
7312* --non-overlapping-opd:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
7313* --nxcompat:                            Options.            (line 1965)
7314* --oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT:               Options.            (line 1065)
7315* --omagic:                              Options.            (line  445)
7316* --out-implib:                          Options.            (line 1756)
7317* --output-def:                          Options.            (line 1748)
7318* --output=OUTPUT:                       Options.            (line  460)
7319* --pic-executable:                      Options.            (line 1078)
7320* --pic-veneer:                          ARM.                (line  133)
7321* --plt-align:                           PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   96)
7322* --plt-static-chain:                    PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  103)
7323* --plt-thread-safe:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  109)
7324* --plugin:                              SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7325* --print-gc-sections:                   Options.            (line  947)
7326* --print-map:                           Options.            (line  402)
7327* --print-output-format:                 Options.            (line  956)
7328* --reduce-memory-overheads:             Options.            (line 1537)
7329* --relax:                               Options.            (line 1094)
7330* --relax on i960:                       i960.               (line   31)
7331* --relax on PowerPC:                    PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
7332* --relax on Xtensa:                     Xtensa.             (line   27)
7333* --relocatable:                         Options.            (line  489)
7334* --retain-symbols-file=FILENAME:        Options.            (line 1120)
7335* --script=SCRIPT:                       Options.            (line  532)
7336* --sdata-got:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
7337* --section-alignment:                   Options.            (line 1931)
7338* --section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG:       Options.            (line 1276)
7339* --secure-plt:                          PowerPC ELF32.      (line   26)
7340* --sort-common:                         Options.            (line 1218)
7341* --sort-section=alignment:              Options.            (line 1233)
7342* --sort-section=name:                   Options.            (line 1229)
7343* --split-by-file:                       Options.            (line 1237)
7344* --split-by-reloc:                      Options.            (line 1242)
7345* --stack:                               Options.            (line 1937)
7346* --stack-analysis:                      SPU ELF.            (line   29)
7347* --stats:                               Options.            (line 1255)
7348* --strip-all:                           Options.            (line  519)
7349* --strip-debug:                         Options.            (line  523)
7350* --stub-group-size:                     PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7351* --stub-group-size=N <1>:               HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
7352* --stub-group-size=N:                   ARM.                (line  138)
7353* --subsystem:                           Options.            (line 1944)
7354* --support-old-code:                    ARM.                (line    6)
7355* --sysroot=DIRECTORY:                   Options.            (line 1259)
7356* --target-help:                         Options.            (line  966)
7357* --target1-abs:                         ARM.                (line   32)
7358* --target1-rel:                         ARM.                (line   32)
7359* --target2=TYPE:                        ARM.                (line   37)
7360* --thumb-entry=ENTRY:                   ARM.                (line   17)
7361* --trace:                               Options.            (line  528)
7362* --trace-symbol=SYMBOL:                 Options.            (line  597)
7363* --traditional-format:                  Options.            (line 1264)
7364* --tsaware:                             Options.            (line 1982)
7365* --undefined=SYMBOL:                    Options.            (line  554)
7366* --unique[=SECTION]:                    Options.            (line  572)
7367* --unresolved-symbols:                  Options.            (line 1301)
7368* --use-blx:                             ARM.                (line   74)
7369* --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables:      ARM.                (line   23)
7370* --verbose[=NUMBER]:                    Options.            (line 1330)
7371* --version:                             Options.            (line  581)
7372* --version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE:   Options.            (line 1338)
7373* --vfp11-denorm-fix:                    ARM.                (line   83)
7374* --warn-alternate-em:                   Options.            (line 1450)
7375* --warn-common:                         Options.            (line 1349)
7376* --warn-constructors:                   Options.            (line 1417)
7377* --warn-multiple-gp:                    Options.            (line 1422)
7378* --warn-once:                           Options.            (line 1436)
7379* --warn-section-align:                  Options.            (line 1440)
7380* --warn-shared-textrel:                 Options.            (line 1447)
7381* --warn-unresolved-symbols:             Options.            (line 1453)
7382* --wdmdriver:                           Options.            (line 1979)
7383* --whole-archive:                       Options.            (line 1462)
7384* --wrap=SYMBOL:                         Options.            (line 1476)
7385* -A ARCH:                               Options.            (line  122)
7386* -a KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  105)
7387* -assert KEYWORD:                       Options.            (line  745)
7388* -b FORMAT:                             Options.            (line  134)
7389* -Bdynamic:                             Options.            (line  748)
7390* -Bgroup:                               Options.            (line  758)
7391* -Bshareable:                           Options.            (line 1211)
7392* -Bstatic:                              Options.            (line  765)
7393* -Bsymbolic:                            Options.            (line  780)
7394* -Bsymbolic-functions:                  Options.            (line  787)
7395* -c MRI-CMDFILE:                        Options.            (line  158)
7396* -call_shared:                          Options.            (line  748)
7397* -d:                                    Options.            (line  168)
7398* -dc:                                   Options.            (line  168)
7399* -dn:                                   Options.            (line  765)
7400* -dp:                                   Options.            (line  168)
7401* -dT SCRIPT:                            Options.            (line  541)
7402* -dy:                                   Options.            (line  748)
7403* -E:                                    Options.            (line  221)
7404* -e ENTRY:                              Options.            (line  187)
7405* -EB:                                   Options.            (line  248)
7406* -EL:                                   Options.            (line  251)
7407* -f NAME:                               Options.            (line  255)
7408* -F NAME:                               Options.            (line  276)
7409* -fini=NAME:                            Options.            (line  300)
7410* -g:                                    Options.            (line  306)
7411* -G VALUE:                              Options.            (line  309)
7412* -h NAME:                               Options.            (line  317)
7413* -i:                                    Options.            (line  326)
7414* -IFILE:                                Options.            (line  903)
7415* -init=NAME:                            Options.            (line  329)
7416* -L DIR:                                Options.            (line  368)
7417* -l NAMESPEC:                           Options.            (line  335)
7418* -M:                                    Options.            (line  402)
7419* -m EMULATION:                          Options.            (line  392)
7420* -Map=MAPFILE:                          Options.            (line  970)
7421* -N:                                    Options.            (line  445)
7422* -n:                                    Options.            (line  439)
7423* -no-relax:                             Options.            (line 1094)
7424* -non_shared:                           Options.            (line  765)
7425* -nostdlib:                             Options.            (line 1059)
7426* -O LEVEL:                              Options.            (line  466)
7427* -o OUTPUT:                             Options.            (line  460)
7428* -P AUDITLIB:                           Options.            (line  177)
7429* -pie:                                  Options.            (line 1078)
7430* -q:                                    Options.            (line  476)
7431* -qmagic:                               Options.            (line 1088)
7432* -Qy:                                   Options.            (line 1091)
7433* -r:                                    Options.            (line  489)
7434* -R FILE:                               Options.            (line  508)
7435* -rpath-link=DIR:                       Options.            (line 1156)
7436* -rpath=DIR:                            Options.            (line 1134)
7437* -S:                                    Options.            (line  523)
7438* -s:                                    Options.            (line  519)
7439* -shared:                               Options.            (line 1211)
7440* -soname=NAME:                          Options.            (line  317)
7441* -static:                               Options.            (line  765)
7442* -t:                                    Options.            (line  528)
7443* -T SCRIPT:                             Options.            (line  532)
7444* -Tbss=ORG:                             Options.            (line 1285)
7445* -Tdata=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
7446* -Trodata-segment=ORG:                  Options.            (line 1295)
7447* -Ttext-segment=ORG:                    Options.            (line 1291)
7448* -Ttext=ORG:                            Options.            (line 1285)
7449* -u SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  554)
7450* -Ur:                                   Options.            (line  562)
7451* -v:                                    Options.            (line  581)
7452* -V:                                    Options.            (line  581)
7453* -x:                                    Options.            (line  587)
7454* -X:                                    Options.            (line  591)
7455* -Y PATH:                               Options.            (line  606)
7456* -y SYMBOL:                             Options.            (line  597)
7457* -z defs:                               Options.            (line  981)
7458* -z KEYWORD:                            Options.            (line  610)
7459* -z muldefs:                            Options.            (line  989)
7460* .:                                     Location Counter.   (line    6)
7461* /DISCARD/:                             Output Section Discarding.
7462                                                             (line   21)
7463* :PHDR:                                 Output Section Phdr.
7464                                                             (line    6)
7465* =FILLEXP:                              Output Section Fill.
7466                                                             (line    6)
7467* >REGION:                               Output Section Region.
7468                                                             (line    6)
7469* [COMMON]:                              Input Section Common.
7470                                                             (line   29)
7471* ABSOLUTE (MRI):                        MRI.                (line   33)
7472* absolute and relocatable symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
7473* absolute expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
7474* ABSOLUTE(EXP):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
7475* ADDR(SECTION):                         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
7476* address, section:                      Output Section Address.
7477                                                             (line    6)
7478* ALIAS (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   44)
7479* ALIGN (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   50)
7480* align expression:                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7481* align location counter:                Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7482* ALIGN(ALIGN):                          Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7483* ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7484* ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN):                  Forced Output Alignment.
7485                                                             (line    6)
7486* aligned common symbols:                WIN32.              (line  424)
7487* ALIGNOF(SECTION):                      Builtin Functions.  (line   64)
7488* allocating memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
7489* architecture:                          Miscellaneous Commands.
7490                                                             (line   72)
7491* architectures:                         Options.            (line  122)
7492* archive files, from cmd line:          Options.            (line  335)
7493* archive search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
7494* arithmetic:                            Expressions.        (line    6)
7495* arithmetic operators:                  Operators.          (line    6)
7496* ARM interworking support:              ARM.                (line    6)
7497* ARM1176 erratum workaround:            ARM.                (line  111)
7498* AS_NEEDED(FILES):                      File Commands.      (line   54)
7499* ASSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7500                                                             (line    9)
7501* assertion in linker script:            Miscellaneous Commands.
7502                                                             (line    9)
7503* assignment in scripts:                 Assignments.        (line    6)
7504* AT(LMA):                               Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7505* AT>LMA_REGION:                         Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7506* automatic data imports:                WIN32.              (line  191)
7507* back end:                              BFD.                (line    6)
7508* BASE (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   54)
7509* BE8:                                   ARM.                (line   28)
7510* BFD canonical format:                  Canonical format.   (line   11)
7511* BFD requirements:                      BFD.                (line   16)
7512* big-endian objects:                    Options.            (line  248)
7513* binary input format:                   Options.            (line  134)
7514* BLOCK(EXP):                            Builtin Functions.  (line   77)
7515* bug criteria:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    6)
7516* bug reports:                           Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
7517* bugs in ld:                            Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
7518* BYTE(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7519                                                             (line    6)
7520* C++ constructors, arranging in link:   Output Section Keywords.
7521                                                             (line   19)
7522* CHIP (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   58)
7523* COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE:                   Environment.        (line   29)
7524* combining symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1349)
7525* command files:                         Scripts.            (line    6)
7526* command line:                          Options.            (line    6)
7527* common allocation:                     Options.            (line  861)
7528* common allocation in linker script:    Miscellaneous Commands.
7529                                                             (line   20)
7530* common symbol placement:               Input Section Common.
7531                                                             (line    6)
7532* COMMONPAGESIZE:                        Symbolic Constants. (line   13)
7533* compatibility, MRI:                    Options.            (line  158)
7534* CONSTANT:                              Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
7535* constants in linker scripts:           Constants.          (line    6)
7536* constraints on output sections:        Output Section Constraint.
7537                                                             (line    6)
7538* constructors:                          Options.            (line  562)
7539* CONSTRUCTORS:                          Output Section Keywords.
7540                                                             (line   19)
7541* constructors, arranging in link:       Output Section Keywords.
7542                                                             (line   19)
7543* Cortex-A8 erratum workaround:          i960.               (line   39)
7544* crash of linker:                       Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7545* CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS:                 Output Section Keywords.
7546                                                             (line    9)
7547* creating a DEF file:                   WIN32.              (line  158)
7548* cross reference table:                 Options.            (line  849)
7549* cross references:                      Miscellaneous Commands.
7550                                                             (line   56)
7551* current output location:               Location Counter.   (line    6)
7552* data:                                  Output Section Data.
7553                                                             (line    6)
7554* DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE): Builtin Functions.
7555                                                             (line   82)
7556* DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP):                 Builtin Functions.  (line  103)
7557* DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP):   Builtin Functions.  (line  109)
7558* dbx:                                   Options.            (line 1269)
7559* DEF files, creating:                   Options.            (line 1748)
7560* default emulation:                     Environment.        (line   21)
7561* default input format:                  Environment.        (line    9)
7562* DEFINED(SYMBOL):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  120)
7563* deleting local symbols:                Options.            (line  587)
7564* demangling, default:                   Environment.        (line   29)
7565* demangling, from command line:         Options.            (line  890)
7566* direct linking to a dll:               WIN32.              (line  239)
7567* discarding sections:                   Output Section Discarding.
7568                                                             (line    6)
7569* discontinuous memory:                  MEMORY.             (line    6)
7570* DLLs, creating:                        Options.            (line 1650)
7571* DLLs, linking to:                      Options.            (line 1779)
7572* dot:                                   Location Counter.   (line    6)
7573* dot inside sections:                   Location Counter.   (line   36)
7574* dot outside sections:                  Location Counter.   (line   66)
7575* dynamic linker, from command line:     Options.            (line  903)
7576* dynamic symbol table:                  Options.            (line  221)
7577* ELF program headers:                   PHDRS.              (line    6)
7578* emulation:                             Options.            (line  392)
7579* emulation, default:                    Environment.        (line   21)
7580* END (MRI):                             MRI.                (line   62)
7581* endianness:                            Options.            (line  248)
7582* entry point:                           Entry Point.        (line    6)
7583* entry point, from command line:        Options.            (line  187)
7584* entry point, thumb:                    ARM.                (line   17)
7585* ENTRY(SYMBOL):                         Entry Point.        (line    6)
7586* error on valid input:                  Bug Criteria.       (line   12)
7587* example of linker script:              Simple Example.     (line    6)
7588* exporting DLL symbols:                 WIN32.              (line   19)
7589* expression evaluation order:           Evaluation.         (line    6)
7590* expression sections:                   Expression Section. (line    6)
7591* expression, absolute:                  Builtin Functions.  (line   10)
7592* expressions:                           Expressions.        (line    6)
7593* EXTERN:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7594                                                             (line   13)
7595* fatal signal:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7596* file name wildcard patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
7597                                                             (line    6)
7598* FILEHDR:                               PHDRS.              (line   62)
7599* filename symbols:                      Output Section Keywords.
7600                                                             (line    9)
7601* fill pattern, entire section:          Output Section Fill.
7602                                                             (line    6)
7603* FILL(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7604                                                             (line   39)
7605* finalization function:                 Options.            (line  300)
7606* first input file:                      File Commands.      (line   82)
7607* first instruction:                     Entry Point.        (line    6)
7608* FIX_V4BX:                              ARM.                (line   49)
7609* FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING:                 ARM.                (line   62)
7610* FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION:               Miscellaneous Commands.
7611                                                             (line   20)
7612* forcing input section alignment:       Forced Input Alignment.
7613                                                             (line    6)
7614* forcing output section alignment:      Forced Output Alignment.
7615                                                             (line    6)
7616* forcing the creation of dynamic sections: Options.         (line  485)
7617* FORMAT (MRI):                          MRI.                (line   66)
7618* functions in expressions:              Builtin Functions.  (line    6)
7619* garbage collection <1>:                Options.            (line  947)
7620* garbage collection <2>:                Input Section Keep. (line    6)
7621* garbage collection:                    Options.            (line  925)
7622* generating optimized output:           Options.            (line  466)
7623* GNU linker:                            Overview.           (line    6)
7624* GNUTARGET:                             Environment.        (line    9)
7625* GROUP(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   47)
7626* grouping input files:                  File Commands.      (line   47)
7627* groups of archives:                    Options.            (line  696)
7628* H8/300 support:                        H8/300.             (line    6)
7629* header size:                           Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
7630* heap size:                             Options.            (line 1690)
7631* help:                                  Options.            (line  962)
7632* HIDDEN:                                HIDDEN.             (line    6)
7633* holes:                                 Location Counter.   (line   12)
7634* holes, filling:                        Output Section Data.
7635                                                             (line   39)
7636* HPPA multiple sub-space stubs:         HPPA ELF32.         (line    6)
7637* HPPA stub grouping:                    HPPA ELF32.         (line   12)
7638* i960 support:                          i960.               (line    6)
7639* image base:                            Options.            (line 1697)
7640* implicit linker scripts:               Implicit Linker Scripts.
7641                                                             (line    6)
7642* import libraries:                      WIN32.              (line   10)
7643* INCLUDE FILENAME:                      File Commands.      (line    9)
7644* including a linker script:             File Commands.      (line    9)
7645* including an entire archive:           Options.            (line 1462)
7646* incremental link:                      Options.            (line  326)
7647* INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION:             Miscellaneous Commands.
7648                                                             (line   25)
7649* initialization function:               Options.            (line  329)
7650* initialized data in ROM:               Output Section LMA. (line   39)
7651* input file format in linker script:    Format Commands.    (line   35)
7652* input filename symbols:                Output Section Keywords.
7653                                                             (line    9)
7654* input files in linker scripts:         File Commands.      (line   19)
7655* input files, displaying:               Options.            (line  528)
7656* input format:                          Options.            (line  134)
7657* input object files in linker scripts:  File Commands.      (line   19)
7658* input section alignment:               Forced Input Alignment.
7659                                                             (line    6)
7660* input section basics:                  Input Section Basics.
7661                                                             (line    6)
7662* input section wildcards:               Input Section Wildcards.
7663                                                             (line    6)
7664* input sections:                        Input Section.      (line    6)
7665* INPUT(FILES):                          File Commands.      (line   19)
7666* INSERT:                                Miscellaneous Commands.
7667                                                             (line   30)
7668* insert user script into default script: Miscellaneous Commands.
7669                                                             (line   30)
7670* integer notation:                      Constants.          (line    6)
7671* integer suffixes:                      Constants.          (line   15)
7672* internal object-file format:           Canonical format.   (line   11)
7673* invalid input:                         Bug Criteria.       (line   14)
7674* K and M integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
7675* KEEP:                                  Input Section Keep. (line    6)
7676* l =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   74)
7677* lazy evaluation:                       Evaluation.         (line    6)
7678* ld bugs, reporting:                    Bug Reporting.      (line    6)
7679* LD_FEATURE(STRING):                    Miscellaneous Commands.
7680                                                             (line   78)
7681* LDEMULATION:                           Environment.        (line   21)
7682* len =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   74)
7683* LENGTH =:                              MEMORY.             (line   74)
7684* LENGTH(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  137)
7685* library search path in linker script:  File Commands.      (line   74)
7686* link map:                              Options.            (line  402)
7687* link-time runtime library search path: Options.            (line 1156)
7688* linker crash:                          Bug Criteria.       (line    9)
7689* linker script concepts:                Basic Script Concepts.
7690                                                             (line    6)
7691* linker script example:                 Simple Example.     (line    6)
7692* linker script file commands:           File Commands.      (line    6)
7693* linker script format:                  Script Format.      (line    6)
7694* linker script input object files:      File Commands.      (line   19)
7695* linker script simple commands:         Simple Commands.    (line    6)
7696* linker scripts:                        Scripts.            (line    6)
7697* LIST (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   77)
7698* little-endian objects:                 Options.            (line  251)
7699* LOAD (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   84)
7700* load address:                          Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7701* LOADADDR(SECTION):                     Builtin Functions.  (line  140)
7702* loading, preventing:                   Output Section Type.
7703                                                             (line   22)
7704* local symbols, deleting:               Options.            (line  591)
7705* location counter:                      Location Counter.   (line    6)
7706* LONG(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7707                                                             (line    6)
7708* M and K integer suffixes:              Constants.          (line   15)
7709* M68HC11 and 68HC12 support:            M68HC11/68HC12.     (line    6)
7710* machine architecture:                  Miscellaneous Commands.
7711                                                             (line   72)
7712* machine dependencies:                  Machine Dependent.  (line    6)
7713* mapping input sections to output sections: Input Section.  (line    6)
7714* MAX:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  143)
7715* MAXPAGESIZE:                           Symbolic Constants. (line   10)
7716* MEMORY:                                MEMORY.             (line    6)
7717* memory region attributes:              MEMORY.             (line   34)
7718* memory regions:                        MEMORY.             (line    6)
7719* memory regions and sections:           Output Section Region.
7720                                                             (line    6)
7721* memory usage:                          Options.            (line  974)
7722* MIN:                                   Builtin Functions.  (line  146)
7723* Motorola 68K GOT generation:           M68K.               (line    6)
7724* MRI compatibility:                     MRI.                (line    6)
7725* MSP430 extra sections:                 MSP430.             (line   11)
7726* NAME (MRI):                            MRI.                (line   90)
7727* name, section:                         Output Section Name.
7728                                                             (line    6)
7729* names:                                 Symbols.            (line    6)
7730* naming the output file:                Options.            (line  460)
7731* NEXT(EXP):                             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
7732* NMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  439)
7733* NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING:                  ARM.                (line  120)
7734* NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING:                 ARM.                (line  127)
7735* NOCROSSREFS(SECTIONS):                 Miscellaneous Commands.
7736                                                             (line   56)
7737* NOLOAD:                                Output Section Type.
7738                                                             (line   22)
7739* not enough room for program headers:   Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
7740* o =:                                   MEMORY.             (line   69)
7741* objdump -i:                            BFD.                (line    6)
7742* object file management:                BFD.                (line    6)
7743* object files:                          Options.            (line   29)
7744* object formats available:              BFD.                (line    6)
7745* object size:                           Options.            (line  309)
7746* OMAGIC:                                Options.            (line  445)
7747* ONLY_IF_RO:                            Output Section Constraint.
7748                                                             (line    6)
7749* ONLY_IF_RW:                            Output Section Constraint.
7750                                                             (line    6)
7751* opening object files:                  BFD outline.        (line    6)
7752* operators for arithmetic:              Operators.          (line    6)
7753* options:                               Options.            (line    6)
7754* ORDER (MRI):                           MRI.                (line   95)
7755* org =:                                 MEMORY.             (line   69)
7756* ORIGIN =:                              MEMORY.             (line   69)
7757* ORIGIN(MEMORY):                        Builtin Functions.  (line  156)
7758* orphan:                                Orphan Sections.    (line    6)
7759* output file after errors:              Options.            (line 1053)
7760* output file format in linker script:   Format Commands.    (line   10)
7761* output file name in linker script:     File Commands.      (line   64)
7762* output format:                         Options.            (line  956)
7763* output section alignment:              Forced Output Alignment.
7764                                                             (line    6)
7765* output section attributes:             Output Section Attributes.
7766                                                             (line    6)
7767* output section data:                   Output Section Data.
7768                                                             (line    6)
7769* OUTPUT(FILENAME):                      File Commands.      (line   64)
7770* OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH):                  Miscellaneous Commands.
7771                                                             (line   72)
7772* OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME):                Format Commands.    (line   10)
7773* OVERLAY:                               Overlay Description.
7774                                                             (line    6)
7775* overlays:                              Overlay Description.
7776                                                             (line    6)
7777* partial link:                          Options.            (line  489)
7778* PE import table prefixing:             ARM.                (line   23)
7779* PHDRS:                                 PHDRS.              (line   62)
7780* PIC_VENEER:                            ARM.                (line  133)
7781* position independent executables:      Options.            (line 1080)
7782* PowerPC ELF32 options:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7783* PowerPC GOT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   33)
7784* PowerPC long branches:                 PowerPC ELF32.      (line    6)
7785* PowerPC PLT:                           PowerPC ELF32.      (line   16)
7786* PowerPC stub symbols:                  PowerPC ELF32.      (line   47)
7787* PowerPC TLS optimization:              PowerPC ELF32.      (line   51)
7788* PowerPC64 dot symbols:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   33)
7789* PowerPC64 ELF64 options:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7790* PowerPC64 multi-TOC:                   PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   74)
7791* PowerPC64 OPD optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   48)
7792* PowerPC64 OPD spacing:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   54)
7793* PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain:  PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  103)
7794* PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety: PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line  109)
7795* PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment:          PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   96)
7796* PowerPC64 stub grouping:               PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line    6)
7797* PowerPC64 stub symbols:                PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   29)
7798* PowerPC64 TLS optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   43)
7799* PowerPC64 TOC optimization:            PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   60)
7800* PowerPC64 TOC sorting:                 PowerPC64 ELF64.    (line   86)
7801* precedence in expressions:             Operators.          (line    6)
7802* prevent unnecessary loading:           Output Section Type.
7803                                                             (line   22)
7804* program headers:                       PHDRS.              (line    6)
7805* program headers and sections:          Output Section Phdr.
7806                                                             (line    6)
7807* program headers, not enough room:      Builtin Functions.  (line  188)
7808* program segments:                      PHDRS.              (line    6)
7809* PROVIDE:                               PROVIDE.            (line    6)
7810* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:                        PROVIDE_HIDDEN.     (line    6)
7811* PUBLIC (MRI):                          MRI.                (line  103)
7812* QUAD(EXPRESSION):                      Output Section Data.
7813                                                             (line    6)
7814* quoted symbol names:                   Symbols.            (line    6)
7815* read-only text:                        Options.            (line  439)
7816* read/write from cmd line:              Options.            (line  445)
7817* region alias:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7818* region names:                          REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7819* REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION):           REGION_ALIAS.       (line    6)
7820* regions of memory:                     MEMORY.             (line    6)
7821* relative expressions:                  Expression Section. (line    6)
7822* relaxing addressing modes:             Options.            (line 1094)
7823* relaxing on H8/300:                    H8/300.             (line    9)
7824* relaxing on i960:                      i960.               (line   31)
7825* relaxing on M68HC11:                   M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   12)
7826* relaxing on Xtensa:                    Xtensa.             (line   27)
7827* relocatable and absolute symbols:      Expression Section. (line    6)
7828* relocatable output:                    Options.            (line  489)
7829* removing sections:                     Output Section Discarding.
7830                                                             (line    6)
7831* reporting bugs in ld:                  Reporting Bugs.     (line    6)
7832* requirements for BFD:                  BFD.                (line   16)
7833* retain relocations in final executable: Options.           (line  476)
7834* retaining specified symbols:           Options.            (line 1120)
7835* rodata segment origin, cmd line:       Options.            (line 1296)
7836* ROM initialized data:                  Output Section LMA. (line   39)
7837* round up expression:                   Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7838* round up location counter:             Builtin Functions.  (line   38)
7839* runtime library name:                  Options.            (line  317)
7840* runtime library search path:           Options.            (line 1134)
7841* runtime pseudo-relocation:             WIN32.              (line  217)
7842* scaled integers:                       Constants.          (line   15)
7843* scommon section:                       Input Section Common.
7844                                                             (line   20)
7845* script files:                          Options.            (line  541)
7846* scripts:                               Scripts.            (line    6)
7847* search directory, from cmd line:       Options.            (line  368)
7848* search path in linker script:          File Commands.      (line   74)
7849* SEARCH_DIR(PATH):                      File Commands.      (line   74)
7850* SECT (MRI):                            MRI.                (line  109)
7851* section address:                       Output Section Address.
7852                                                             (line    6)
7853* section address in expression:         Builtin Functions.  (line   17)
7854* section alignment:                     Builtin Functions.  (line   64)
7855* section alignment, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1440)
7856* section data:                          Output Section Data.
7857                                                             (line    6)
7858* section fill pattern:                  Output Section Fill.
7859                                                             (line    6)
7860* section load address:                  Output Section LMA. (line    6)
7861* section load address in expression:    Builtin Functions.  (line  140)
7862* section name:                          Output Section Name.
7863                                                             (line    6)
7864* section name wildcard patterns:        Input Section Wildcards.
7865                                                             (line    6)
7866* section size:                          Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
7867* section, assigning to memory region:   Output Section Region.
7868                                                             (line    6)
7869* section, assigning to program header:  Output Section Phdr.
7870                                                             (line    6)
7871* SECTIONS:                              SECTIONS.           (line    6)
7872* sections, discarding:                  Output Section Discarding.
7873                                                             (line    6)
7874* segment origins, cmd line:             Options.            (line 1285)
7875* SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT):       Builtin Functions.  (line  159)
7876* segments, ELF:                         PHDRS.              (line    6)
7877* shared libraries:                      Options.            (line 1213)
7878* SHORT(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7879                                                             (line    6)
7880* SIZEOF(SECTION):                       Builtin Functions.  (line  167)
7881* SIZEOF_HEADERS:                        Builtin Functions.  (line  183)
7882* small common symbols:                  Input Section Common.
7883                                                             (line   20)
7884* SORT:                                  Input Section Wildcards.
7885                                                             (line   63)
7886* SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT:                     Input Section Wildcards.
7887                                                             (line   54)
7888* SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY:                 Input Section Wildcards.
7889                                                             (line   58)
7890* SORT_BY_NAME:                          Input Section Wildcards.
7891                                                             (line   46)
7892* SORT_NONE:                             Input Section Wildcards.
7893                                                             (line  104)
7894* SPU:                                   SPU ELF.            (line   29)
7895* SPU ELF options:                       SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7896* SPU extra overlay stubs:               SPU ELF.            (line   19)
7897* SPU local store size:                  SPU ELF.            (line   24)
7898* SPU overlay stub symbols:              SPU ELF.            (line   15)
7899* SPU overlays:                          SPU ELF.            (line    9)
7900* SPU plugins:                           SPU ELF.            (line    6)
7901* SQUAD(EXPRESSION):                     Output Section Data.
7902                                                             (line    6)
7903* stack size:                            Options.            (line 1937)
7904* standard Unix system:                  Options.            (line    7)
7905* start of execution:                    Entry Point.        (line    6)
7906* STARTUP(FILENAME):                     File Commands.      (line   82)
7907* strip all symbols:                     Options.            (line  519)
7908* strip debugger symbols:                Options.            (line  523)
7909* stripping all but some symbols:        Options.            (line 1120)
7910* STUB_GROUP_SIZE:                       ARM.                (line  138)
7911* SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN):            Forced Input Alignment.
7912                                                             (line    6)
7913* suffixes for integers:                 Constants.          (line   15)
7914* symbol defaults:                       Builtin Functions.  (line  120)
7915* symbol definition, scripts:            Assignments.        (line    6)
7916* symbol names:                          Symbols.            (line    6)
7917* symbol tracing:                        Options.            (line  597)
7918* symbol versions:                       VERSION.            (line    6)
7919* symbol-only input:                     Options.            (line  508)
7920* symbolic constants:                    Symbolic Constants. (line    6)
7921* symbols, from command line:            Options.            (line  877)
7922* symbols, relocatable and absolute:     Expression Section. (line    6)
7923* symbols, retaining selectively:        Options.            (line 1120)
7924* synthesizing linker:                   Options.            (line 1094)
7925* synthesizing on H8/300:                H8/300.             (line   14)
7926* TARGET(BFDNAME):                       Format Commands.    (line   35)
7927* TARGET1:                               ARM.                (line   32)
7928* TARGET2:                               ARM.                (line   37)
7929* text segment origin, cmd line:         Options.            (line 1292)
7930* thumb entry point:                     ARM.                (line   17)
7931* TI COFF versions:                      TI COFF.            (line    6)
7932* traditional format:                    Options.            (line 1264)
7933* trampoline generation on M68HC11:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7934* trampoline generation on M68HC12:      M68HC11/68HC12.     (line   31)
7935* unallocated address, next:             Builtin Functions.  (line  150)
7936* undefined symbol:                      Options.            (line  554)
7937* undefined symbol in linker script:     Miscellaneous Commands.
7938                                                             (line   13)
7939* undefined symbols, warnings on:        Options.            (line 1436)
7940* uninitialized data placement:          Input Section Common.
7941                                                             (line    6)
7942* unspecified memory:                    Output Section Data.
7943                                                             (line   39)
7944* usage:                                 Options.            (line  962)
7945* USE_BLX:                               ARM.                (line   74)
7946* using a DEF file:                      WIN32.              (line   57)
7947* using auto-export functionality:       WIN32.              (line   22)
7948* Using decorations:                     WIN32.              (line  162)
7949* variables, defining:                   Assignments.        (line    6)
7950* verbose[=NUMBER]:                      Options.            (line 1330)
7951* version:                               Options.            (line  581)
7952* version script:                        VERSION.            (line    6)
7953* version script, symbol versions:       Options.            (line 1338)
7954* VERSION {script text}:                 VERSION.            (line    6)
7955* versions of symbols:                   VERSION.            (line    6)
7956* VFP11_DENORM_FIX:                      ARM.                (line   83)
7957* warnings, on combining symbols:        Options.            (line 1349)
7958* warnings, on section alignment:        Options.            (line 1440)
7959* warnings, on undefined symbols:        Options.            (line 1436)
7960* weak externals:                        WIN32.              (line  407)
7961* what is this?:                         Overview.           (line    6)
7962* wildcard file name patterns:           Input Section Wildcards.
7963                                                             (line    6)
7964* Xtensa options:                        Xtensa.             (line   56)
7965* Xtensa processors:                     Xtensa.             (line    6)
7966
7967
7968
7969Tag Table:
7970Node: Top815
7971Node: Overview1600
7972Node: Invocation2714
7973Node: Options3122
7974Node: Environment95055
7975Node: Scripts96815
7976Node: Basic Script Concepts98549
7977Node: Script Format101256
7978Node: Simple Example102119
7979Node: Simple Commands105215
7980Node: Entry Point105721
7981Node: File Commands106654
7982Node: Format Commands110655
7983Node: REGION_ALIAS112611
7984Node: Miscellaneous Commands117443
7985Node: Assignments121051
7986Node: Simple Assignments121562
7987Node: HIDDEN123297
7988Node: PROVIDE123927
7989Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN125120
7990Node: Source Code Reference125364
7991Node: SECTIONS128944
7992Node: Output Section Description130835
7993Node: Output Section Name131922
7994Node: Output Section Address132798
7995Node: Input Section135033
7996Node: Input Section Basics135834
7997Node: Input Section Wildcards139740
7998Node: Input Section Common144834
7999Node: Input Section Keep146316
8000Node: Input Section Example146806
8001Node: Output Section Data147774
8002Node: Output Section Keywords150551
8003Node: Output Section Discarding154120
8004Node: Output Section Attributes155301
8005Node: Output Section Type156402
8006Node: Output Section LMA157473
8007Node: Forced Output Alignment160544
8008Node: Forced Input Alignment160812
8009Node: Output Section Constraint161201
8010Node: Output Section Region161629
8011Node: Output Section Phdr162062
8012Node: Output Section Fill162726
8013Node: Overlay Description163868
8014Node: MEMORY168171
8015Node: PHDRS172506
8016Node: VERSION177760
8017Node: Expressions185853
8018Node: Constants186782
8019Node: Symbolic Constants187657
8020Node: Symbols188208
8021Node: Orphan Sections188955
8022Node: Location Counter190120
8023Node: Operators194556
8024Node: Evaluation195478
8025Node: Expression Section196842
8026Node: Builtin Functions200499
8027Node: Implicit Linker Scripts208460
8028Node: Machine Dependent209235
8029Node: H8/300210251
8030Node: i960211876
8031Node: M68HC11/68HC12214080
8032Node: ARM215534
8033Node: HPPA ELF32223497
8034Node: M68K225120
8035Node: MMIX226029
8036Node: MSP430227194
8037Node: PowerPC ELF32228243
8038Node: PowerPC64 ELF64231079
8039Node: SPU ELF237235
8040Node: TI COFF239867
8041Node: WIN32240393
8042Node: Xtensa260518
8043Node: BFD263483
8044Node: BFD outline264938
8045Node: BFD information loss266224
8046Node: Canonical format268741
8047Node: Reporting Bugs273098
8048Node: Bug Criteria273792
8049Node: Bug Reporting274491
8050Node: MRI281530
8051Node: GNU Free Documentation License286173
8052Node: LD Index311329
8053
8054End Tag Table
8055